Catalogo area ICT

Transcription

Catalogo area ICT
wwwknowkit
AREA ICT
Acrobat Professional
Creare grafica web con Photoshop e Fireworks
Dreamweaver - base
Dreamweaver - avanzato
Flash - base
Flash - avanzato
Illustrator - base
Illustrator - avanzato
Illustrator - per la stampa
InDesign - base
InDesign - avanzato
InDesign - Digital Publishing
Photoshop - base
Photoshop - avanzato
Photoshop - ritocco fotografico
Premiere - base
Premiere - avanzato
Corso preparatorio alla certificazione
ECDL CORE
Corso preparatorio alla certificazione
ECDL ADVANCED
OS X Server Essentials 107
OS X Support Essentials 107
AutoCAD - base
AutoCAD - avanzato
AutoCAD - 3D
ADOBE
6
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
AICA
28
29
APPLE
30
31
AUTODESK
32
33
34
CISCO
Deploying Cisco ASA Firewall Solutions
36
Deploying Cisco ASA VPN Solutions
37
Deploying Cisco ASA Firewall Solutions
38
Implementing Cisco IP Routing
39
Implementing Cisco Multicast
40
Implementing Cisco Storage Networking Solutions
41
Implementing Cisco Switched Networks
42
Implementing Cisco Unified Communications Manager, Part 1
43
Implementing Cisco Unified Communications Manager, Part 2
44
Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices, Part 1
45
Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices, Part 2
46
Securing Networks with Cisco Routers and Switches
47
Troubleshooting and Maintaining Cisco IP Networks
48
GOOGLE
Google Apps for Business
50
IBM
Building IBM Lotus Domino 8 Infrastructure
52
Building Web Applications with IBM Lotus Domino Designer 8
54
Developing IBM Lotus Domino 8 Applications: Intermediate
Skills
55
Fundamentals of IBM Lotus Domino 8 Application Development
56
IBM Lotus Domino 8 System Administration Operating
Fundamentals
58
Lotus Notes 85 per Utenti
59
Managing IBM Lotus Domino 8 Servers and Users
60
Using LotusScript in IBM Lotus Domino 7 Applications
61
Architect Enterprise Applications with Java EE
Developing Applications for the Java EE 6 Platform
Developing Applications With the Java SE6 Platform
Java ME Develop Applications for Mobile Phones
Java Performance Tuning and Optimization
Java SE7 Develop Rich Client Applications
Java SE7 Programming
Java SE Performance Tuning
Java SE7 Fundamentals
Object-Oriented Analysis and Design Using UML
ASP
ASPNET
Fogli di stile - CSS
HTML - base
HTML - avanzato
Linguaggio C
Linguaggio C++
Object-Oriented
Perl
PHP
UML
Visual Basic
Web e posta elettronica
XML
Exchange Server
JAVA
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
72
74
75
76
78
79
80
81
82
83
85
86
87
88
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
90
»» Configuring, Managing and Troubleshooting Microsoft
Exchange Server 2010
90
»» Core Solutions of Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
92
»» Designing and Deploying Messaging Solutions with
Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
93
»» Introduction to Installing and Managing Microsoft
Exchange Server 2007
94
»» Planning, Deploying, and Managing Microsoft Exchange
Server 2010 Unified Messaging
95
Lync Server
96
»» Core Solutions of Microsoft Lync Server 2013
96
»» Planning and Designing a Microsoft Lync Server 2010
Solution
98
Office 365 - Novità 2013
100
»» Microsoft Jump Start - Office 365 for IT Professionals 100
Private Cloud
101
»» Configuring and Deploying a Private Cloud with System
Center 2012
101
»» Monitoring and Operating a Private Cloud with System
Center 2012
102
Sharepoint 2010
103
»» Configuring and Administering Microsoft SharePoint 2010
103
»» Designing a Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Infrastructure 104
»» Designing and Developing Microsoft SharePoint Server
2010 Applications
106
»» Microsoft SharePoint 2010, Application Development 108
»» Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Search for Application
Developers
110
SQL Server 2008
111
»» Basics of Transact SQL with SQL Server 2008 R2
111
»» Dashboards for Monitoring, Analyzing and Managing 113
»» Designing and Optimizing Database Solutions with
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
115
»» Implementing a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Database
116
»» Implementing and Maintaining Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Analysis Services
118
»» Implementing and Maintaining Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Integration Services
119
»» Implementing and Maintaining Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Reporting Services
120
»» Maintaining a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Database121
»» Writing Queries Using Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Transact-SQL
123
SQL Server 2012
124
»» Administering Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Databases 124
»» Designing Business Intelligence Solutions with Microsoft
SQL Server 2012
126
»» Designing Database Solutions for Microsoft SQL Server
2012
128
»» Developing Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Databases
130
»» Implementing a Data Warehouse with Microsoft SQL
Server 2012
132
»» Implementing Data Models and Reports with Microsoft
SQL Server 2012
134
»» Querying Microsoft SQL Server 2012
136
System Center Manager
138
»» Administering System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
138
»» Deploying System Center 2012 Configuration Manager140
»» Planning, Deploying and Managing Microsoft System
Center Configuration Manager 2007
142
Virtualization
144
»» Implementing and Managing Microsoft Desktop
Virtualization
144
»» Implementing and Managing Microsoft Server
Virtualization
146
Visual Studio - Linguaggi
148
»» Developing ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
148
»» Programming in C#
150
»» Programming in HTML5 with JavaScript and CSS3
152
Visual Studio 2010
154
»» Developing Data Access Solutions with Microsoft Visual
Studio 2010
154
»» Developing Web Applications with Microsoft Visual Studio
2010
156
»» Developing Windows Applications with Microsoft Visual
Studio 2010
158
»» Developing Windows Communication Foundation
Solutions with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
160
»» Fundamentals of XAML and Microsoft Expression Blend
161
»» Introduction to HTML5
162
»» Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft Visual
Studio 2010
163
»» Programming in C# with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 165
»» Programming in Visual Basic with Microsoft Visual Studio
2010
167
»» Windows Azure Solutions with Microsoft Visual Studio
2010
169
Windows Azure
170
»» Advanced SQL Azure
170
»» Developing Windows Azure and Web Services
171
Windows Desktop
173
»» Configuring Windows 8
173
»» Installing and Configuring Windows 7 Client
175
»» Planning and Managing Windows 7 Desktop Deployments
and Environments
176
»» Troubleshooting and Supporting Windows 7 in the
Enterprise
178
Windows Server 2008
179
»» Automating Windows Server 2008 Administration with
Windows PowerShell
179
»» Configuring and Troubleshooting a Windows Server 2008
Network Infrastructure
180
»» Configuring and Troubleshooting Identity and Access
Solutions with Windows Server 2008 Active Directory 182
»» Configuring and Troubleshooting Internet Information
Services in Windows Server 2008
183
»» Configuring and Troubleshooting Windows Server 2008
Active Directory Domain Services
184
»» Configuring and Troubleshooting Windows Server 2008
Application Infrastructure
186
»» Deploying Windows Server 2008
187
»» Designing Windows Server 2008 Active Directory
Infrastructure and Services
189
»» Designing Windows Server 2008 Network and
Applications Infrastructure
190
»» Implementing and Administering Windows SharePoint
Services 3.0 in Windows Server 2008
191
»» Implementing and Managing Windows Server 2008
Clustering
192
»» Planning and Implementing Windows Server 2008
193
Windows Server 2012
195
»» Administering Windows Server 2012
195
»» Configuring Advanced Windows Server 2012 Services 196
»» Designing and Implementing a Server Infrastructure 197
»» Implementing a Desktop Infrastructure
199
»» Implementing an Advanced Server Infrastructure
201
»» Implementing Desktop Application Environments
203
»» Installing and Configuring Windows Server 2012
205
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
Access - base
Access - intermedio
Access - avanzato
Excel - base
Excel - intermedio
Excel - avanzato
Office 365 - Novità 2013
Outlook - base
Outlook - avanzato
Outlook - Gestione efficace della posta e del tempo
PowerPoint - base
PowerPoint - avanzato
PowerPoint - Presentazioni ad alto impatto
Project - base
208
209
210
211
213
214
216
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
Project - intermedio
Project - avanzato
Publisher
Visio
Word - base
Word - intermedio
Word - avanzato
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
MOBILE
Sviluppo applicazioni per Android
Sviluppo applicazioni per IPhone e IPad
234
236
OPENSOURCE
Desktop Publishing con Scribus
Gimp - grafica bitmap
OpenOffice Calc - base
OpenOffice Calc - intermedio
OpenOffice Calc - avanzato
OpenOffice DataBase - base
OpenOffice DataBase - avanzato
OpenOffice Impress - base
OpenOffice Impress - avanzato
OpenOffice Writer - base
OpenOffice Writer - intermedio
OpenOffice Writer e Draw - avanzato
Pentaho - Introduzione
Pentaho CE - Creare cruscotti ad effetto
Pentaho CE - Implementare un datawarehouse
Pentaho Data Integration - Implementare soluzioni di
integrazione dati
238
239
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
256
RED HAT
Red Hat Enterprise Deployment and Systems Management 258
Red Hat Enterprise Directory Services and Authentication 259
Red Hat Enterprise Security Network Services
260
Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization
261
Red Hat Linux Troubleshooting
262
Red Hat System Administration I
263
Red Hat System Administration II
264
Red Hat System Administration III
265
SICUREZZA INFORMATICA
Certified Ethical Hacker (CEH)
Computer Hacking Forensic Investigator (CHFI)
EC-Council Network Security Administrator (ENSA)
SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 Administration 3103
SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 Administration
266
267
268
SUSE
270
271
SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 Fundamentals
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 Administration
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 Administration
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10: Networking Services
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10: Security
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Administration
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Advanced Administration
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Fundamentals
Introduzione a UNIX
Programmazione in UNIX Shell
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
UNIX
280
281
Acrobat Professional
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze necessarie per creare e
modificare documenti elettronici di qualsiasi origine in formato PDF
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni di grafica
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Convertire un documento originale in formato PDF scegliendo il processo di
trasformazione più appropriato
• Creare PDF interattivi in termini di navigabilità e fruizione
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Presentazione di Adobe Acrobat Professional e comprensione dell’interfaccia
• Il formato PDF: definizione e caratteristiche
• Documenti PDF per la consultazione elettronica e per la stampa
•
•
•
•
•
Convertire documenti in formato PDF
Creare file PDF con PDF Writer
Creare file PDF con Acrobat Distiller
La creazione di PDF da Microsoft Office, Internet Explorer, Visio, Project e Autocad
Conversione di pagine Web in PDF
•
•
•
•
•
•
Progettare pubblicazioni PDF interattive
Utilizzare e creare collegamenti
Creare, spostare, modificare e nidificare segnalibri
creazione e uso degli articoli
Creare e utilizzare le miniature delle pagine
Creare collegamenti fra documenti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modificare i documenti PDF
Ritagliare, spostare, inserire ed eliminare pagine
Modificare l’orientamento delle pagine
Unire più documenti e creare intestazioni, piè di pagina e filigrane
Modificare testi e immagini
Utilizzare collegamenti e segnalibri per eseguire azioni
Convertire file immagine in formato PDF
•
•
•
•
•
Usare Acrobat nel ciclo di revisione di un documento
Aggiungere note di tipo testo
Aggiungere note di tipo grafico
Eliminare, esportare ed importare note
Raccogliere le note in un sommario
7
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creare moduli
Completare un modulo
Aggiungere campi ad un modulo
Aggiungere campi di calcolo
Aggiungere pulsanti
Usare l’azione Mostra/Nascondi campo
•
•
•
•
Indicizzare una raccolta di documenti
Creare un indice
Migliorare la ricerca negli indici
Controllare le opzioni di Catalog
•
•
•
•
La distribuzione dei documenti PDF
Ottimizzare la qualità di output dei documenti PDF
La funzione di Preflight
Compressione e ricampionamento
ADOBE
ADOBE
6
• La firma digitale di Acrobat Professional
• Impostare profili di firma con Acrobat Self Sign
• Firmare e convalidare la firma con Acrobat Self Sign
• Protezione dei documenti PDF
• Protezione in apertura e modifica
• Impostare la schermata di apertura di un documento
AREA ICT - Adobe
AREA ICT - Adobe
Creare grafica web con Photoshop e Fireworks
Dreamweaver - base
9
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Professionisti che intendano creare rapidamente elementi per siti web, interfacce per
applicazioni e visualizzazioni interattive
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni di grafica
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze necessarie per creare
siti Web con Dreamweaver ed avere una panoramica delle caratteristiche principali del
programma
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Ottimizzare immagini ed animazioni per il Web con Photoshop
• Esportare in contenuti in Fireworks per l’integrazione in siti web
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenze di base di HTML e nozioni di grafica
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare un sito con gli elementi di base quali testi, immagini, collegamenti
• Lavorare con i dati dinamici
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
L’area di lavoro in Adobe Photoshop e Adobe Fireworks
Panoramica degli strumenti
Opzioni di visualizzazione
Gestione delle palette
Ottimizzazione dell’area di lavoro
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione a Dreamweaver
• Comprendere l’interfaccia
• Impostare le preferenze
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le immagini
Importare immagini e modalità di selezione delle aree da modifcare
Lavorare con i livelli
Fotoritocco di base e gestione del colore
Ottimizzare le immagini per il web
• Creare animazioni e rollover in Fireworks
• Lavorare con le sezione per le gestione di mappe interattive
•
•
•
•
•
Importare i contenuti di Adobe Photoshop in Adobe Fireworks
Strumenti di miglioramento di design
Strumenti di scalatura e ottimizzazione
Esportazione di CSS
Generazione di file in formato PDF
AREA ICT - Adobe
•
•
•
•
•
•
Progettare pagine di base
Accesso al codice
Utilizzo dei fogli di stile
Lavorare con il testo
Inserimento di immagini
Creazione di Web Links
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Aggiunta di funzionalità di progettazione avanzate
Lavorare con i DIV e le AP
I Behavoiur
Le Tabelle
Moduli interattivi
Creazione di elenchi
Utilizzo di frame e frameset
Lavorare con i JavaScript Frameworks
•
•
•
•
Integrare con dati dinamici
I dati dinamici e gestione dei dati
Lavorare con i Live Data
Lavorare con Pagine Multiple
ADOBE
ADOBE
8
AREA ICT - Adobe
Dreamweaver - avanzato
Flash - base
11
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze per integrare contenuti
avanzati nelle pagine web di un sito
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base di Dreamweaver
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze necessarie per creare
semplici animazioni per il Web ed avere una panoramica delle caratteristiche principali
del programma
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Integrare contenuti di altre applicazioni
• Utilizzare le estensioni di Dreamweaver
Prerequisiti:
Competenze grafiche di base
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inserimenti di elementi multimediali in Dreamweaver
Integrazione con Adobe Photoshop, Fireworks e Bridge
Inserimento di filmati Flash
Aggiunta di video e audio nelle pagine Web
Migliorare la produttività e la gestione del sito Web
Utilizzo delle Libraries
Ottimizzazione della compatibilità tra browsers
Costruire siti web con un Team
Integrazione con XML e XSLT
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Disegnare forme con Flash utilizzando gli strumenti di disegno
• Aggiungere e formattare il testo
• Creare simboli e lavorare con le istanze
• Usare la Timeline e animare gli oggetti tramite il tweening
• Aggiungere suoni al filmato
• Pubblicare il filmato in formato web
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Introduzione all’applicazione
Creazione di un nuovo documento Flash
Gestione dell’ area di lavoro, delle preferenze e delle proprietà del file
Gestione delle palette e organizzazione del lavoro in livelli
•
•
•
•
Estensioni di Dreamweaver
Personalizzazione di Dreamweaver
Comportamenti server Handling
Creazione di applicazioni Adobe AIR
•
•
•
•
Disegnare in Flash
Creare forme di base
Modificare le forme
Disegnare con la penna
• Lavorare con il colore
• Applicare riempimenti, tracce e sfumature
• Ricalcare le immagini bitmap
• Uso delle immagini bitmap in Flash
• Formati di importazione
• Importazione di documenti di Illustrator e Photoshop in Flash
• Creazione e uso dei simboli
• Gestione delle librerie
• Lavorare con il testo
• Tipi di testo
• Incorporare i Font
•
•
•
•
Creare semplici animazioni
La Timeline e Il tweening
Tweening con le forme
Animazione dei simboli
• Importare suoni
• Flash e i formati audio
• Controllo audio
• Esportare in formato WEB
• I formati Flash, HTML, GIF, QuickTime
AREA ICT - Adobe
AREA ICT - Adobe
ADOBE
ADOBE
10
Flash - avanzato
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda sviluppare siti e/o animazioni complessi e
dinamici in Flash
Prerequisiti:
Buona padronanza di Flash
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Disegnare elementi di interfacce
• Condividere e caricare un filmato
• Creare Moduli interattivi
• Modificare e ottimizzare suoni
• Ottimizzare le immagini in Flash
• Integrare il contenuto con HTML
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Disegnare elementi di interfacce
• Creare pulsanti per un menu
• Creare testo scorrevole
•
•
•
•
Animazione con il Motion Editor Panel
Gestione dei fotogrammi chiave e proprietà
Percorsi animazione
Invertire i percorsi
•
•
•
•
•
•
Caricamento di filmati
Formati video e incorporazione di video
Aggiunta di CuePoint
Introduzione ad ActionScript
Il pannello azioni
I gestori di eventi
13
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le immagini
Convertire un’immagine bitmap in vettoriale
Ottimizzare le immagini bitmap con altri programmi
Esportare immagini
• Integrazione con HTML
ADOBE
ADOBE
12
• Inviare e ricevere dati
• Creazione di un modulo
• Utilizzo dei componenti (CheckBox, ComboBox, DataGrid, Elenco, ProgressBar,
RadioButton, TextArea, ScrollPane…)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modificare e ottimizzare suoni
Impostare il punto di inizio e di fine di un suono
Applicare effetti audio
Ottimizzare il suono
Impostazioni di pubblicazione per l’audio
Gestire librerie di suoni
•
•
•
•
•
•
Utilizzo avanzato delle linee temporali
Target e percorsi
Percorsi assoluti e percorsi relativi
Proprietà e metodi di clip filmato
Il gestore di clip filmato: onClipEvent
Posizionamento, scala e rotazione di clip filmato
AREA ICT - Adobe
AREA ICT - Adobe
Illustrator - base
Illustrator - avanzato
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze necessarie per creare e
gestire semplici illustrazioni vettoriali
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda perfezionare l’uso di Illustrator per ottenere
soluzioni di alto impatto grafico
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni di grafica
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni base di Illustrator
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Disegnare, combinare e trasformare forme vettoriali
• Colorare e applicare sfumature
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Realizzare un documento ad alto impatto grafico
• Combinare grafica di Illustrator con altre applicazioni di grafica
• Predisporre al meglio l’elaborato per la stampa
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
L’area di lavoro
Panoramica e selezioni degli strumenti
Opzioni di visualizzazione e tavola di lavoro
Gestione delle palette
Ottimizzazione dell’area di lavoro
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Modalità avanzate di disegno e pittura
Ricalco dinamico
Pittura dinamica
La Guida dei colori
•
•
•
•
•
Creare forme di base
Impostare le dimensioni del documento
Utilizzare gli strumenti e i comandi per creare forme semplici
Utilizzare i righelli, le guide e la griglia
Disegnare poligoni e tracciati
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selezione e colore
Metodi selezione
Applicare il colore di riempimento
Applicare il colore alla traccia
Creare una palette personalizzata
Copiare gli attributi di colore e aspetto da un oggetto all’altro
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con il testo
Aggiungere testo a un documento
Controlli tipografici avanzati
Stili di carattere e di paragrafo
Inserire testo in un contenitore e lungo un tracciato
Applicare un involucro al testo
Flusso del testo e contorna testo
Le maschere di testo
• Fondere forme e colori
• Creare un riempimento sfumato
• Creare fusioni di colore omogeneo
•
•
•
•
Utilizzare attributi di aspetto, stili ed effetti
Creare un attributo di aspetto
Copiare ed eliminare attributi di aspetto
Applicare effetti avanzati
• Creare e lavorare con i simboli
•
•
•
•
•
Trasformare gli oggetti
Selezionare oggetti singoli, oggetti raggruppati e parte di un oggetto
Spostare, ridimensionare e ruotare gli oggetti utilizzando diversi metodi
Riflettere, inclinare e distorcere gli oggetti
Regolare la prospettiva di un oggetto
AREA ICT - Adobe
15
ADOBE
ADOBE
14
• Lavorare con il livelli
• Creare livelli, livelli nidificati e gruppi
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stampare disegni e creare le selezioni colore
Gestione del colore
La palette info documento
Le selezioni del colore
Creare illustrazioni a due colori
Abbondanza e sovrastampa
Anteprima e stampa
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Combinare grafica di Illustrator e Photoshop
Immagini vettoriali e bitmap
Inserire e/o incorporare immagini di Adobe Photoshop
Maschere di opacità e maschere di ritaglio
Esportare un file con livelli in Adobe Photoshop
Supporto dei livelli di Illustrator nel PDF
La palette dei collegamenti
AREA ICT - Adobe
Illustrator - per la stampa
InDesign - base
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Utenti che intendano creare documenti per la stampa come volantini, depliants e
piccole pubblicazioni, inserendo grafica vettoriale di base, testo e immagini
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi desidera imparare a creare pubblicazioni di taglio
editoriale con contenuti misti di testo e grafica
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni di grafica
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni di grafica
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Realizzare un documento per la stampa composto di testo, forme, immagini
• Preparare al meglio l’elaborato per la stampa
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
L’area di lavoro
Panoramica e selezioni degli strumenti
Opzioni di visualizzazione
Gestione delle palette
Ottimizzazione dell’area di lavoro
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare un documento con InDesign
• Inserire testo e immagini
• Applicare modifiche ai testi e alle immagini
• Gestire il flusso del testo nel documento
• Preparare il documento per la stampa
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Impostare un documento per la stampa
Dimensioni del documento e suddivisione in pagine
Utilizzare i righelli, le guide e la griglia
Organizzare il lavoro in livelli
•
•
•
•
Introduzione a InDesign
Comprensione dell’area di lavoro per il montaggio del documento
Aprire un documento esistente
Zoom e spostamenti
•
•
•
•
•
Disegnare e modificare vettori
Disegnare poligoni e altre forme vettoriali
Nozioni base di disegno con lo strumento Penna
Modificare le forme
Lavorare con i simboli
•
•
•
•
•
•
Impostazione di un documento
Creare un nuovo documento
Creare pagine mastro e applicarle al documento
Modificare le pagine mastro
Creare cornici segnaposto per testo e immagini
Aggiungere le sezioni per la numerazione delle pagine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le cornici
Inserire una cornice di testo
Modificare il tracciato di una cornice
Inserire una cornice immagine
Ridimensionare e adattare cornice e contenuto
Disporre il testo intorno ad un oggetto
Adattare il contenuto alla cornici
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Importare e modificare testo
Inserire e disporre il testo
Lo scorrimento del testo: manuale e automatico
Aggiornare i file di testo collegati
Sequenziare il testo su più pagine
Lavorare con le colonne di testo
Ricercare e sostituire testo
Controllo ortografico
L’editor dei brani
• Colorare
• Applicare riempimenti, tracce e sfumature
• Nozioni sui pennelli
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione del testo
Aggiungere testo a un documento
Inserire testo in contenitori e lungo i tracciati
Disporre il testo attorno ad un’immagine e in un “contenitore”
Convertire il testo in contorni
Creare maschere di testo
•
•
•
•
Combinare grafica di Illustrator e Photoshop
Inserire e incorporare immagini di Adobe Photoshop
Creare maschere di ritaglio e di opacità
Gestione dei collegamenti
•
•
•
•
•
Stampare disegni e creare le selezioni colore
Gestione e metodi di colore
Creare le selezioni del colore
Abbondanza e sovrastampa
Esportare in PDF
AREA ICT - Adobe
• Utilizzare gli stili
• Stili di carattere e di paragrafo
AREA ICT - Adobe
17
ADOBE
ADOBE
16
InDesign - avanzato
18
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione delle immagini
Grafica vettoriale e grafica bitmap
Inserire immagini da altre applicazioni
Gestire i collegamenti dei file importati
I tracciati di ritaglio di InDesign e Photoshop
Inserire un file di Illustrator
uso delle librerie per la catalogazione dei materiali
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Applicare il colore
Introduzione ai metodi di colore
Creazione e uso di colori, tonalità e gradienti
Colorare forme, testi e immagini
Creare una tonalità e una tinta piena
Trasparenza e metodi di fusione
Effetti speciali e forature
AREA ICT - Adobe
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi desidera approfondire l’utilizzo di InDesign attraverso
l’utilizzo di funzionalità avanzate dell’applicazione
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni base di InDesign e grafica
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Utilizzare le impostazioni avanzate per la gestione del testo
• Creare e gestire forme vettoriali
• Inserire e gestire tabelle
• Gestire il colore
• Distribuire un file completo per la stampa
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Breve introduzione a InDesign e all’area di lavoro
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Impostazioni tipografiche avanzate in InDesign
Stili di carattere e di paragrafo
Regolare la spaziatura verticale
Aggiungere caratteri decorativi e caratteri speciali
Applicare gradienti al testo
Applicare riempimenti e contorni al testo
Creare dei capolettera
Crenatura e tracking
La composizione multi riga e a riga singola
Tabulazioni, rientri e filetti di paragrafo
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disegno avanzato con InDesign
Impostare la griglia del documento
Disegnare rette, tracciati aperti e chiusi, curve
Disegnare combinazioni di segmenti di curva e retta
Creare tracciati composti
Tagliare un tracciato con lo strumento Forbici
Trasformazione degli oggetti
•
•
•
•
•
Tecniche avanzate per l’uso delle cornici
Creare e aprire modelli di documento
Creazione di immagini varie
Inserimento di cornici di testo in profili di testo
Duplicare e raggruppare oggetti grafici
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le Tabelle
Creare e modificare tabelle in InDesign
Importare tabelle da Excel e Word
Gestione di intestazioni e piè di pagina nelle tabelle
Formattare le tabelle
ADOBE
ADOBE
• Preparare il documento per la Stampa
• Eseguire una verifica preliminare alla stampa
Versione:
19
AREA ICT - Adobe
21
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Realizzare Libri con InDesign
La palette libro
Sincronizzare i documenti di un libro
Numerare le pagine di un libro
Generare e formattare il sommario
Formattare il sommario
Generare e formattare un indice
La Concordanza del Colore
Il flusso di lavoro CMYK orientato alla stampa
Impostare i profili di destinazione predefiniti
Attivare la gestione del colore
Gestire i colori delle immagini
Assegnare un profilo dopo l’importazione dell’immagine
Incorporare un profilo in un’immagine TIFF di Photoshop
Assegnare il profilo durante l’importazione di un’immagine
Incorporare un profilo in un’immagine di Illustrator
Incorporare un profilo in un file PDF
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda convertire prodotti editoriali tradizionali per la
stampa in contenuti digitali adatti ai nuovi media come tablet e devices simili
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con InDesign
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare in InDesign un prodotto con un layout digitale adeguato
• Aggiungere interattività e navigazione all’interno del documento
• Utilizzare gli strumenti dell’applicazione per creare viste panoramiche, scorrimenti,
visualizzazioni per il web
• Comprendere la struttura delle cartelle e dei file per la pubblicazione digitale
• Esportare il documento per la visualizzazione su dispositivi Apple, Android e altri
• Esportare un PDF interattivo
• Caricare e testare il documento sui principali devices mobili
• Distribuire la pubblicazione digitale
Durata:
2 giorni
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stampa di Documenti
Gestione del Trapping
Sovrastampare linee, riempimenti
Trapping e oggetti neri
Creare l’abbondanza
Impostare le opzioni relative alla carta
Preparare le selezioni
Impostare la frequenza di retino
Impostare le opzioni per la grafica ed i font
Aggiungere i segni di pagina
Creare il pacchetto di file per la consegna
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Il processo di Digital Publishing
Strutturazione del documento in InDesign
Inserimento di contenuto
Aggiunta di modalità navigazione
Aggiunta di interattività di base
Aggiunta di interattività tramite Overlay Creator
Creazione di diversi formati di orientamento
Pubblicazione su dispositivi IPad, Android e altri formati
Pubblicazione di un PDF interattivo
Test e distribuzione
• Esportare in altri formati
• Esportare un documento in PDF
• Esportare un documento come EPS
AREA ICT - Adobe
AREA ICT - Adobe
ADOBE
ADOBE
InDesign - Digital Publishing
20
Photoshop - base
Photoshop - avanzato
23
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è rivolto a chi voglia acquisire oppure consolidare le operatività di base in
Adobe Photoshop
Audience:
Questo corso è rivolto a chi voglia consolidare la conoscenza di Adobe Photoshop per
creare grafica di alta qualità
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo, nozioni base di grafica
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e conoscenza di base dell’applicativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Analizzare un’immagine e decidere l’operatività migliore per la sua modifica
• Lavorare con gli strumenti di selezione
• Lavorare in modo autonomo con i livelli
• Colorare con gli strumenti di pittura
• Creare e lavorare con le maschere e i canali
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Applicare modifiche migliorative alla tonalità delle immagini
• Creare e lavorare con semplici tracciati vettoriali
• Lavorare creativamente con i livelli
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Il ritocco fotografico
Risoluzione e dimensione dell’immagine
Tecniche di ritaglio di un’immagine alla dimensione finale
Correzione automatica del colore
Regolare manualmente la gamma dei toni
•
•
•
•
•
•
Uso avanzato dei livelli
Creare un livello di regolazione
Creare un livello sfumatura
Lavorare con i livelli di testo
Applicare stili di livello
Le maschere di livello
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
L’area di lavoro
Panoramica e selezioni degli strumenti
Opzioni di visualizzazione
Gestione delle palette
Ottimizzazione e personalizzazione dell’area di lavoro
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le selezioni
Gli strumenti di selezione “manuale”
Selezionare dalla modalità maschera
Estrarre un’immagine con gli strumenti avanzati di selezione
•
•
•
•
I livelli
Organizzare un’immagine su livelli
Operatività sui livelli
Le composizioni di livelli
•
•
•
•
•
Disegnare e colorare
Selezionare il colore
Creare campioni di colore
Gli strumenti manuali di pittura
Riempimenti e sfumature
•
•
•
•
•
Maschere e canali
Creare e modificare una maschera veloce
Salvare una selezione come maschera
Scontornare un’immagine tramite maschera
Applicare un filtro o un riempimento ad una selezione mascherata
AREA ICT - Adobe
• Immagini vettoriali e tracciati
• Disegnare forme e maschere di livello vettoriali
• Incorporare oggetti vettoriali avanzati
•
•
•
•
•
Utilizzo dello strumento Penna
Creare tracciati retti, curvi e misti con lo strumento Penna
Convertire le selezioni in tracciati
Convertire i tracciati in selezioni
Combinazione di grafica vettoriale e bitmap in Photoshop
AREA ICT - Adobe
ADOBE
ADOBE
22
Photoshop - ritocco fotografico
Premiere - base
25
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze necessarie per utilizzare
Adobe Photoshop nell’ambito della fotografia digitale e del fotoritocco
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi desidera comprendere le basi del montaggio non lineare
di video e clip
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni base di grafica
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e nozioni di grafica
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Padroneggiare le tecniche relative alla gestione delle immagini bitmap (risoluzione,
colore, esportazione)
• Scegliere e utilizzare in modo appropriato gli strumenti di fotoritocco in Photoshop
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Acquisire clip per un progetto di Premiere
• Procedere al montaggio delle singole clip
• Inserire transizioni audio-video e titolazioni
Durata:
1 giorno
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
L’area di lavoro
Utilizzo avanzato del Browser File per la ricerca dei file
Il riquadro di anteprima e le palette personalizzabili
Archivio dei file (inserimento e modifica dei metadati)
Contenuti
• Introduzione al montaggio non lineare
• Il flusso di lavoro standard nella produzione e post-produzione di video digitale
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ritagliare e modificare la risoluzione di una immagine
Acquisire un immagine
Ricomposizione di un’immagine (uso del comando Taglierina)
Modificare la dimensione in pixel di una immagine
Lavorare con la risoluzione di una immagine
I formati di esportazione: JPG, GIF, PDF, e TIFF
I formati Camera Raw, JPEG 2000, e PNG
Automatizzare le operazioni di ridimensionamento utilizzando le Azioni, Batch e i
Droplet
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fotoritocco standard
I metodi di colore (RGB, CMYK, Scala di grigio)
Correzione colore (rimozione di dominanti cromatiche)
Luminosità e Contrasto
Correzione Luci/Ombre
Comando Corrispondenza colore
Sostituisci colore
Palette Istogramma
Adobe Photomerge per unire più foto in composizioni panoramiche
• Strumenti manuali di Fotoritocco
• Timbri e pennelli e secchiello
• Alterazione Marionetta
•
•
•
•
•
Metodi avanzati di Fotoritocco
Livelli di regolazione
Cenni sulle maschere
Maschere di livello e regolazione dei toni
Filtri fotografici
•
•
•
•
Presentazione del lavoro finale
Impostazioni principali di stampa
Livelli di composizione
Galleria di foto per il web e pacchetto di immagini
AREA ICT - Adobe
• L’area di lavoro di Premiere
• Panoramica degli strumenti e palette
• Personalizzazione dello spazio di lavoro
•
•
•
•
•
Riprendere e acquisire un video
Cenni ad Adobe OnLocation
Acquisire video con Premiere
Acquisizione da nastro
Acquisizione da altri formati multimediali
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un progetto
Creazione di un file di progetto
Impostazione delle Risorse
Gestione dei raccoglitori
Utilizzo del Browser multimediale
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un semplice montaggio
Impostazione di un storyboard
Inserimento delle clip sulla Timeline
Taglio delle clip
•
•
•
•
Inserire le transizioni
Utilizzo del pannello Controllo effetti
La modalità A/B
Transizioni audio
•
•
•
•
•
Inserire i Titoli
Inserire testi
Adattare un testo ad tracciato
Scorrimento del testo ed effetti speciali
Inserire forme
ADOBE
ADOBE
24
• Salvataggio ed esportazione del lavoro
AREA ICT - Adobe
ADOBE
26
Premiere - avanzato
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi desidera approfondire l’uso di Premiere per creare
filmati completi di suoni e titoli
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza di Premiere
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Realizzare filmati dinamici corredati di dialoghi, animazioni, suoni, e titolazioni
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Modalità avanzate di montaggio
Sostituzione di una clip e metraggio
Lavorare con i punti attacco e stacco
Creazione di clip secondarie
Montaggio multicamera
•
•
•
•
•
•
Aggiunta di effetti video
Effetti video di base
Lavorare con i fotogrammi chiave
Interpolazione e velocità per i key frames
Effetti di luce
Creazione di predefiniti
•
•
•
•
•
Movimentare le clip
Modificare le dimensioni e ruotare le clip
Ombre e bordi
Effetti 3D di base
Modalità per rallentare ed invertire le clip
•
•
•
•
•
Acquisizione e montaggio dell’audio
Registrazione della voce e regolazione del volume
Aggiungere tagli
Il Mixer Audio
Trascrizione dell’audio
• Tecniche avanzate di composizione
• Uso di maschere, canali alfa e fusioni
• Integrazione di Premiere con altre applicazioni
• Importazione dei livelli di Photoshop per creare sequenze animate
• Salvataggio ed esportazione del lavoro
AREA ICT - Adobe
28
Corso preparatorio alla certificazione
ECDL ADVANCED
Corso preparatorio alla certificazione
ECDL CORE
Versione:
Syllabus 50
Versione:
Syllabus ECDL Advanced
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano prepararsi all’esame ECDL Core
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano prepararsi all’esame ECDL Advanced
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente acquisirà tutte le competenze necessarie per affrontare
con successo l’esame ECDL Core
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo e delle principali applicazioni di Office
Automation
Durata:
7 giorni
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente acquisirà tutte le competenze necessarie per affrontare
con successo l’esame ECDL Advanced
Contenuti
• Modulo 1: Concetti di base dell'ICT (Concepts of Information and Communication
Technology)
Durata:
5 giorni
Contenuti
• AM3 - Elaborazione testi
• Modulo 2: Uso del computer e gestione dei file (Using the Computer and Managing
Files)
• Modulo 3: Elaborazione testi (Word processing)
• Modulo 4: Fogli elettronici (Spreadsheets)
29
• AM4 - Foglio elettronico
• AM5 - Basi di dati
• AM6 - Presentazioni
• Modulo 5: Uso delle basi di dati (Using Databases)
• Modulo 6: Strumenti di presentazione (Presentation)
AICA
AICA
• Modulo 7: Navigazione e comunicazione in rete (Web Browsing and
Communication)
AREA ICT - AICA
AREA ICT - AICA
OS X Server Essentials 107
Version:
31
Version:
Audience:
This course is designed for help desk specialists, technical coordinators, and entry-level
system administrators who implement and maintain networks using OS X Server
Prerequisites:
• Understanding of OS X
• Experience with OS X in a network environment
• Basic OS X troubleshooting experience or Lion 101
Objectives:
OS X Support Essentials 107
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Understand the features of OS X Server v107
• Configure essential services on OS X Server
• Use OS X Server tools to monitor and troubleshoot services
• Use OS X Server to manage a small network of Macintosh computers and users
• Manage access to files and services
Duration:
3 giorni
Content
• Module 1: Installing and Configuring OS X Server
• Module 2: Authenticating and Authorizing Accounts
• Module 3: Using Open Directory
• Module 4: Managing Accounts
• Module 5: Implementing Deployment Solutions
• Module 6: Using File Sharing
Audience:
Help desk specialists, technical coordinators, service technicians, and others who
support Mac users, technical support personnel in businesses that use Macs, technical
coordinators or power users who manage networks of computers running OS X
Prerequisites:
Knowledge of OS X and basic computer navigation
Objectives:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Troubleshoot process and become more efficient with available tools and resources
Duration:
3 giorni
Content
• Module 1: Installation
• Module 2: User Accounts
• Module 3: File Systems
• Module 4: Data Management
• Module 5: Applications and Processes
• Module 6: Network Configuration
• Module 7: Network Services
• Module 8: Peripherals and Printing
• Module 9: System Startup
APPLE
APPLE
30
• Module 7: Managing Web Services
• Module 8: Using Collaborative Services
AREA ICT - Apple
AREA ICT - Apple
AutoCAD - base
AutoCAD - avanzato
33
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze di base del disegno
tecnico al computer
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda approfondire le competenze del disegno tecnico
al computer
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo, nozioni di grafica e dei concetti generali del disegno
tecnico
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza dell’ applicazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare un disegno tecnico in 2D
• Disegnare e modificare i vari elementi di un disegno CAD
• Quotare il disegno
• Stampare il disegno
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Utilizzare gli strumenti avanzati per la gestione di blocchi dinamici
• Lavorare con attributi e riferimenti esterni
• Effettuare il collegamento dei dati con excel
• Gestire le immagini raster
• Eseguire operatività avanzate di stampa e pubblicazione
Durata:
5 giorni
Durata:
4 giorni
Contenuti
• Presentazione di Adobe Acrobat Professional e comprensione dell’interfaccia
• Il formato PDF: definizione e caratteristiche
• Documenti PDF per la consultazione elettronica e per la stampa
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Tecniche avanzate di editazione e disegno
Il disegno parametrico
Uso dei grips
Utilizzo dei layer
•
•
•
•
Blocchi dinamici e attributi
Editor blocchi
Estrazione degli attributi in Excel e in tabelle
Collegamento a database esterni
•
•
•
•
Introduzione al disegno tecnico
Panoramica sull'interfaccia di lavoro
Input dinamico e da tastiera
Aprire, visualizzare e salvare un disegno
• Strumenti di disegno e progettazione
• Immisione delle coordinate
• Puntamento e snap
• Riferimenti esterni e immagini
• Inserimento d'immagini, di DWF e di altri disegni
•
•
•
•
Inserire forme standard
Strumenti di selezione
Strumenti di modifica
Proprietà degli oggetti
•
•
•
•
Tabelle e campi
Campi calcolati e inserimento di informazioni
Creazione, importazione, esportazione di tabelle
Gestione collegamento dati con Excel
•
•
•
•
Inserire testi e note
Inserire tabelle
Quotare gli oggetti
Simboli e blocchi
•
•
•
•
•
Spazio carta e uso di Layout
Layout e finestre mobili per stampare e lavorare
Gestione avanzata degli stili di quota per la carta
Stili di stampa con nome e basati sul colore
Impostazione e configurazione del plotter
• Impostare il foglio per la stampa
• Impostare il cartiglio, le finestre e la scala
• Lavorare nella carta con quote e testi
•
•
•
•
• File DWT e file di standard DWS
La stampa
Impostare gli stili di stampa e il plotter
Anteprima di stampa
Il formato DWF e la stampa raster
AREA ICT - Autodesk
AREA ICT - Autodesk
AUTODESK
AUTODESK
32
AUTODESK
34
AutoCAD - 3D
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda approfondire le competenze del disegno tecnico
3D al computer
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza dell’applicazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Rappresentare in modo fotorealistica gli oggetti disegnati in Autocad mediante l’uso
del motore di rendering interno
Durata:
4 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Principi di disegno tridimensionale
Le viste tridimensionali
Le Coordinate Utente: UCS
Tecniche di modellazione di superfici 3D
La modellazione solida e la modifica
Esempi di modellazione solida
La visualizzazione fotorealistica
La prospettiva e l’orbita 3D
La luce
Applicazione dei materiali standard agli oggetti 3D
Il rendering fotorealistico
Applicazioni di materiali e tecniche di mappaggio
Le mappe-texture
AREA ICT - Autodesk
36
Deploying Cisco ASA Firewall Solutions
Versione:
Deploying Cisco ASA VPN Solutions
37
Versione:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Prerequisiti:
• Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) certification
• Cisco Certified Network Associate Security (CCNA Security) certification
• Working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Evaluate the basic firewall technology, features, hardware models, and licensing
options of the Cisco ASA security appliance
• Implement and troubleshoot basic Cisco ASA security appliance connectivity and
device management plane features
• Configure and verify Cisco ASA security appliance network integration
• Configure and verify Cisco ASA security appliance policy
• Configure and verify high availability and virtualization on Cisco ASA security
appliances
•
•
•
•
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Describe the general properties of the Cisco ASA VPN subsystem
• Implement and maintain Cisco clientless remote access SSL VPNs on the Cisco ASA
adaptive security appliance VPN gateway
• Implement and maintain Cisco AnyConnect client-based remote access SSL
VPNs on the Cisco ASA security appliance VPN gateway according to policies and
environmental requirements
• Implement and maintain Cisco remote access IPsec VPNs on the Cisco ASA VPN
gateway according to policies and environmental requirements
• Implement and maintain site-to-site VPN solutions on the Cisco ASA security
appliance VPN gateway according to policies and environmental requirements
• Deploy endpoint security with Cisco Secure Desktop and DAP, and deploy and
manage high-availability and high-performance features of the Cisco ASA security
appliance
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• The Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance VPN Architecture and Common
Components
• Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance Clientless Remote Access SSL VPN Solutions
• Cisco AnyConnect Remote Access SSL Solutions
• Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance Remote Access IPsec VPNs
• Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance Site-to-Site IPsec VPN Solutions
• High Availability and High Performance for Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance
VPNs
AREA ICT - Cisco
Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance Introduction
Basic Connectivity and Device Management
Network Integration
Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance Policy Control
Cisco ASA Adaptive Security Appliance High Availability and Virtualization
Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) certification
Cisco Certified Network Associate Security (CCNA Security) certification
Deploying Cisco ASA Firewall Solutions (FIREWALL)
Working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system
AREA ICT - Cisco
CISCO
CISCO
Audience:
Deploying Cisco ASA Firewall Solutions
Versione:
Implementing Cisco IP Routing
39
Versione:
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Prerequisiti:
Before taking the ARCH v21 course, learners should be familiar with internetworking
technologies, Cisco products, and Cisco IOS features
Prerequisiti:
CCNA
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Introduce the Cisco Network Architectures for the Enterprise and explain how
this concept addresses enterprise network needs for performance, scalability, and
availability
• Describe how the Cisco Network Architectures for the Enterprise can be used as a
framework for designing enterprise networks
• Create conceptual, intermediate, and detailed enterprise campus network designs
• Create conceptual, intermediate, and detailed enterprise data center designs
• Create conceptual, intermediate, and detailed enterprise edge and remote
infrastructure designs
• Create conceptual, intermediate, and detailed network service designs for security
considerations
• Create conceptual, intermediate, and detailed VPN designs
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Course Introduction
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Plan and document the configuration and verification of routing protocols and their
optimization in enterprise networks
• Identify the technologies, components, and metrics of EIGRP used to implement
and verify EIGRP routing in diverse, large-scale internetworks based on
requirements
• Identify, analyze, and match OSPF multiarea routing functions and benefits for
routing efficiencies in network operations in order to implement and verify OSPF
routing in a complex enterprise network
• Implement and verify a redistribution solution in a multi-protocol network that
uses Cisco IOS features to control path selection and provides a loop-free topology
according to a given network design and requirements
• Evaluate common network performance issues and identify the tools needed to
provide Layer 3 path control that uses Cisco IOS features to control the path
• Implement and verify a Layer 3 solution using BGP to connect an enterprise network
to a service provider
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 0: Course Overview
• Module 1: Cisco Network Architectures for the Enterprise
• Module 2: Enterprise Campus Network Design
• Module 3: Advanced Addressing and Routing Design
• Module 4: Advanced WAN Services Design Considerations
• Module 5: Enterprise Data Center Design
• Module 6: E-Commerce Module Design
• Module 7: SAN Design Considerations
• Module 8: Security Services Design
• Module 9: IPsec and SSL VPN Design
• Module 10: IP Multicast Design
• Module11: Network Management Capabilities with Cisco IOS Software
AREA ICT - Cisco
• Module 1: Planning Routing Services
• Module 2: Implementing an EIGRP based Solution
• Module 3: Implementing a Scalable Multiarea Network OSPF based Solution
• Module 4: Implement an IPv4 based redistribution solution
• Module 5: Implement Path Control
• Module 6: Connecting an Enterprise Network to ISP Networks
• E-Learning ROUTE-01 of 3: Implement Path Control
• E-Learning ROUTE-02 of 3: Implementing IPv6
• E-Learning ROUTE-03 of 3: Implementing Routing Facilities for Branch Offices and
Mobile Workers
AREA ICT - Cisco
CISCO
CISCO
38
Implementing Cisco Multicast
Versione:
41
Versione:
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Prerequisiti:
The knowledge and skills that a learner must have before attending this course are as
follows:
• Work experience and configuration skills for Cisco routers and LAN switches
• Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) certification: Interconnecting Cisco
Network Devices: Accelerated (CCNAX) or Interconnecting Cisco Network Devices
Part 1 (Version 11) (ICND1) and Interconnecting Cisco Network Devices Part 2
(Version 11) (ICND2)Implementing Cisco IP Routing (ROUTE)
Prerequisiti:
Basic understanding of data storage hardware components and protocols, including SCSI
and Fibre Channel
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Given a SAN environment, identify the components, services, and features of
the MDS 9000 platform that can be used to improve the availability, scalability,
performance, and manageability of the SAN
• Given an MDS 9000 switch, safely install the switch hardware and perform the initial
software configuration process -Given a SAN design, implement the logical topology
specified by a SAN design, so that connectivity between end devices can be verified
• Given a SAN design, describe the traffic management features associated with
Intelligent Network Services for the MDS 9000 series in order to configure basic
traffic management services for the SAN
• Given a SAN environment, describe how to use FCIP to implement appropriate
solutions for SAN extension
• Given a SAN environment, identify MDS 9000 diagnostic tools in order to diagnose
SAN problems and common configuration errors
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: MDS 9000 Platform
Obiettivi
formativi:
The Implementing Cisco Multicast (MCAST) v20 course is a five-day instructor-led course
covering the fundamentals of IP multicasting, which includes multicast applications,
sources, receivers, group management, and IP multicast routing protocols (such as
Protocol Independent Multicast, PIM) used within a single administrative domain
(intradomain) The issues of switched LAN environments and reliable IP multicasting
are covered as well The course provides technical solutions for simple deployments
of IP multicast within a provider or customer network The curriculum provides the
configuration and troubleshooting guidelines for implementation of IP multicast on
Cisco routers The labs provide students with the hands-on experience needed to
successfully deploy IP multicast
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Course Introduction
• Module 1: IP Multicast Concepts and Technologies
• Module 2: Multicast on the LAN
• Module 3: PIM Sparse Mode
• Module 4: Rendezvous Point Engineering
• Module 2: System Installation and Initial Configuration
• Module 3: Building Virtual SANs
• Module 4: Implementing FCIP
• Module 6: Troubleshooting Tools and Scenarios
• Module 5: PIM Sparse Mode Protocol Extensions
• Module 6: Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP
• Module 7: Interdomain IP Multicast
• Module 8: IP Multicast Security
• Module 9: Multicast Optimization and High Availability Features
• Module 10: Applications of Multicast
• Labs
AREA ICT - Cisco
AREA ICT - Cisco
CISCO
CISCO
40
Implementing Cisco Storage Networking
Solutions
Implementing Cisco Switched Networks
Versione:
43
Versione:
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Prerequisiti:
CCNA
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Analyze campus network designs
• Implement VLANs in a network campus
• Implement spanning tree
• Implement inter-VLAN routing in a campus network
• Implement a highly available network
• Implement high-availability technologies and techniques using multilayer switches
• Implement security features in a switched network
• Integrate WLANs into a campus network
• Accommodate voice and video in campus networks
• Working knowledge of fundamental terms and concepts of computer networking
including LANs
• WANs, and IP switching and routing
• Ability to configure and operate Cisco routers and switches and to enable VLANs
and DHCP
• Basics of digital interfaces, PSTN, and VoIP
• Fundamental knowledge of converged voice and data networks
• Ability to configure Cisco IOS gateways with traditional and VoIP call legs
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Describe Cisco Unified Communications Manager, including its functions,
architecture, deployment and redundancy options, and how to install or upgrade
• Perform Cisco Unified Communications Manager initial configuration and user
management
• Configure Cisco Unified Communications Manager to support on-cluster calling
• Implement PSTN access in Cisco Unified Communications Manager and to build a
dial plan in a single-site Cisco
• Implement Cisco Unified Communications Manager media resources
• Implement Cisco Unified Communications Manager features and applications
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Content
• Module 0: Course Overview
• Module 1: Analyzing Campus Network Designs
• Module 2: Implementing VLANs in Campus Networks
• Module 3: Implementing Spanning Tree
• Module 4: Implementing Inter-VLAN Routing
• Module 5: Implementing First Hop Redundancy in a Campus Environment
• Module 6: Implementing a Highly Available Network
• Module 7: Minimizing Service Loss and Data Theft in a Campus Network
Course Introduction
Introduction to Cisco Unified Communications Manager
Enabling Single-Site On-Net Calling
Single-Site Off-Net Calling
Media Resources
Feature and Application Implementation
• Module 8: Integrating Wireless LANs into a Campus Network
• Module 9: Accommodating Voice and Video in Campus Networks
AREA ICT - Cisco
AREA ICT - Cisco
CISCO
CISCO
42
Implementing Cisco Unified Communications
Manager, Part 1
Versione:
Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices,
Part 1
45
Versione:
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Prerequisiti:
The knowledge and skills that a learner must have before attending this course are as
follows:
• Working knowledge of converged voice and data networks
• Working knowledge of the MGCP, SIP, and H323 protocols and their implementation
on Cisco IOS gateways
• Ability to configure and operate Cisco routers and switches
• Ability to configure and operate Cisco Unified Communications Manager in a singlesite environment
Prerequisiti:
The knowledge and skills that a learner must have before attending this course are as
follows:
• Basic computer literacy
• Basic Microsoft Windows navigation skills
• Basic Internet usage skills
• Basic e-mail usage skills
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Describe how networks function, identifying major components, function of
network components, and the OSI reference model
• Using the host-to-host packet delivery process, describe issues related to increasing
traffic on an Ethernet LAN and identify switched LAN technology solutions to
Ethernet networking issues
• Describe the reasons for extending the reach of a LAN and the methods that can be
used, with a focus on RF wireless access
• Describe the reasons for connecting networks with routers and how routed
networks transmit data through networks using TCP / IP
• Describe the function of WANs, the major devices of WANs, and configure PPP
encapsulation, static and dynamic routing, PAT, and RIP routing
• Use the command-line interface to discover neighbours on the network and manage
the router start up and configuration
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Course Introduction
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Describe multisite deployment issues and solutions, and describe and configure
required dial plan elements
• Implement call-processing resiliency in remote sites by using Cisco Unified SRST,
MGCP fallback, and Cisco Unified Communications Manager Express in Cisco Unified
SRST mode
• Implement bandwidth management and CAC to prevent oversubscription of the IP
WAN
• Implement Device Mobility and Cisco Extension Mobility
• Describe and implement CCD deployments
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
It covers globalized call routing, Cisco Service Advertisement Framework (SAF) and
Call Control Discovery (CCD), tail-end hop-off (TEHO), Cisco Unified Survivable Remote
Site Telephony (SRST), and mobility features such as Cisco Device Mobility and Cisco
Extension Mobility You will apply a dial plan for a multisite environment including TEHO,
configure survivability for remote sites during WAN failure and implement solutions
to reduce bandwidth requirements in the IP WAN You will also enable Call Admission
Control (CAC) including Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Preconditions and automated
alternate routing (AAR)
• Module 1: Building a Simple Network
• Module 2: Ethernet LANs
• Module 3: WLANs
• Module 4: LAN Connections
• Module 5: WAN Connections
• Module 6: Network Environment Management Capstone Lab: Network Environment
Management Lab Guide
AREA ICT - Cisco
AREA ICT - Cisco
CISCO
CISCO
44
Implementing Cisco Unified Communications
Manager, Part 2
Versione:
Securing Networks with Cisco Routers and
Switches
47
Versione:
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Audience:
Channel Partner / Reseller, Customer, Employee
Prerequisiti:
The knowledge and skills that a learner must have before attending this course are as
follows:
• Basic computer literacy
• Basic Microsoft Windows navigation skills
• Basic Internet usage skills
• Basic e-mail usage skills
• The ability to install, configure, and troubleshoot a small network
Prerequisiti:
The knowledge and skills that a learner must have before attending this course:
• BCisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) certification
• Interconnecting Cisco Network Devices 1 (ICND1)
• Interconnecting Cisco Network Devices 2 (ICND2)
• Cisco Certified Network Associate Security (CCNA Security) certification
• Implementing Cisco IOS Network Security (IINS)
• Working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Review how to configure and troubleshoot a small network
• Expand the switched network from a small LAN to a medium-sized LAN with
multiple switches, supporting VLANs, trunking, and spanning tree
• Describe routing concepts as they apply to a medium-sized network and discuss
considerations when implementing routing on the network
• Configure, verify, and troubleshoot OSPF
• Configure, verify, and troubleshoot EIGRP
• Determine how to apply ACLs based on network requirements, and to configure,
verify, and troubleshoot ACLs on a medium-sized network
• Describe when to use NAT or PAT on a medium-sized network and configure NAT or
PAT on routers
• Identify and implement the appropriate WAN technology based on network
requirements
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Implement and maintain Cisco IOS Software infrastructure protection controls in a
Cisco router- and switch-based network infrastructure
• Implement and maintain Cisco IOS Software threat control and containment
technologies in a Cisco router-based perimeter infrastructure
• Implement and maintain Cisco IOS Software VPN technologies in a Cisco routerbased WAN
• Implement and maintain Cisco IOS Software remote access VPN technologies in a
Cisco router-based remote access solution
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Deploying Cisco IOS Software Network Foundation Protection Lesson
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Course Introduction
• Module 2: Deploying Cisco IOS Software Threat Control and Containment
• Module 3: Deploying Cisco IOS Software Site-to-Site Transmission Security
• Module 4: Deploying Secure Remote Access with Cisco IOS Software
• Module 1: Small Network Implementation
• Module 2: Medium-Sized Switched Network Construction
• Module 3: Medium-Sized Routed Network Construction
• Module 4: Single-Area OSPF Implementation
• Module 5: EIGRP Implementation
• Module 6: Access Control Lists
• Module 7: Address Space Management
• Module 8: LAN Extension into a WAN
AREA ICT - Cisco
AREA ICT - Cisco
CISCO
CISCO
46
Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices,
Part 2
CISCO
48
Troubleshooting and Maintaining Cisco IP
Networks
Versione:
Audience:
Network professionals who want to increase their skill level at maintaining and
troubleshooting complex Cisco IP networks The typical job roles for this type of
professional are network engineers, network operations center (NOC) technical support
personnel, or help desk technicians
Prerequisiti:
The knowledge and skills that a learner must have before attending this course are as
follows:
• Cisco CCNA® certification
• Knowledge and experience of the implementation and verification of enterprise
routing and switching technologies as offered by the SWITCH and ROUTE courses or
equivalent skills and knowledge
Obiettivi
formativi:
Upon completing this course, the learner will be able to meet these overall objectives:
• Plan and document the most commonly performed maintenance functions in
complex enterprise networks
• Develop a troubleshooting process to identify and resolve problems in complex
enterprise networks
• Select tools that best support specific troubleshooting and maintenance processes
in large, complex enterprise networks
• Practice maintenance procedures and fault resolution in switching based
environments
• Practice maintenance procedures and fault resolution in routing based
environments
• Practice maintenance procedures and fault resolution in a secure infrastructure
• Practice maintenance procedures and fault resolution problems in a complex
environment
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Troubleshooting and Maintaining Cisco IP Networks (TSHOOT) v10 is a five-day
course designed to help network professionals hone the skills and knowledge needed
to maintain their network and to diagnose and resolve network problems quickly
and effectively It also assists the network professional in preparing for Cisco CCNP
certification The TSHOOT course is a component of the CCNP curriculum
The TSHOOT course is designed to teach professionals that work in complex network
environments the necessary skills to maintain their networks and to diagnose and
resolve network problems quickly and effectively The course will provide information
about troubleshooting and maintaining particular technologies, as well as procedural
and organizational aspects of the troubleshooting and maintenance process A large
part of the training will consist of practicing these skills and reinforcing the concepts by
putting them to use in a controlled environment At the end of the course, the learners
will have increased their skill level and developed as set of best practices based on their
own and other learners’ experiences that they can take back to their organizations
AREA ICT - Cisco
Google Apps for Business
51
Applicazioni web di Google per la produttività aziendale
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di uno qualsiasi dei principali sistemi operativi tradizionali (Ms Windows,
MacOs, Linux) e/o di ambienti Mobile (Android, iOS)
Pratica nella navigazione di internet e nella conoscenza dei browser
Conoscenza di base dei software di Office Automation (Videoscrittura, Foglio di Calcolo,
Presentazione)
Obiettivi
formativi:
Google Apps è una suite di produttività basata sulla cloud che aiuta l’individuo e il suo
gruppo di lavoro (Business o Education) a restare sempre in contatto e a lavorare da
qualsiasi luogo su qualunque dispositivo
È semplice da configurare, utilizzare e gestire e consente di risparmiare tempo e risorse
economiche
Il corso fornisce tutte le informazioni necessarie per iniziare a lavorare con le Google
Apps all’interno di un contesto aziendale
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione a Google Apps for Business e alla Cloud di Google
• I vantaggi della Cloud di Google
• Panoramica di Google Apps for Business
• Google Mail
• Differenze tra Google Mail gratuita e Google Mail all’interno di Google Apps
• Ottimizzare l’email, la messaggistica e i servizi di chat per la produttività con il
proprio Team
• Configurazione dell’account
• Email sul cellulare
• I contatti
• La ricerca dei messaggi
• Etichette e filtri
• interoperatività con Calendar
• Delega email e traduttore personale
• Configurazione del client di posta desktop
• Impostazioni di sicurezza
• Integrazione di Google Mail con MS Outlook
• Esercitazioni pratiche e simulazioni su casi reali
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Google Docs
Creare e lavorare con i Documenti di testo
Creare e lavorare con i Fogli di lavoro
Inserire Formule, Grafici e diagrammi
Strumenti di analisi dei dati
Creare e lavorare con le Presentazioni
Inserire Moduli semplici e Disegni
Stili personalizzati e Galleria di modelli
Stampa
Google Drive
Accesso a Google Drive
Apertura e visualizzazione dei file
Ricerca i file
Importazione di documenti esistenti
Esportazione dei documenti
Modifica in modalità mobile
Cronologia delle revisioni
Impostazioni di sicurezza
L’uso della Chat collaborativa a distanza
Lavorare condividendo documenti: i permessi di lettura e di modifica
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Google Sites
Costruire ambienti collaborativi per la gestione dei progetti
Archiviazione dei documenti
Utilizzo dei modelli
Ricerca dei documenti
Gestione delle autorizzazioni
Impostazioni di sicurezza
• Panoramica delle altre applicazioni Google for Business:
• Groups for Business, Cloud Connect for Microsoft Office, Google+, Fusion Tables,
Traduttore, Picasa…etc
Google Calendar
Il calendario individuale e condiviso
La pianificazione degli eventi
Il Calendario sul dispositivo mobile
Delega del calendario
Lavora in fusi orari diversi
Configurazione del client sul desktop
Promemoria per gli eventi
Informazioni sulla disponibilità
Impostazioni di sicurezza
Esercitazioni pratiche e simulazioni su casi reali
AREA ICT - Google
AREA ICT - Google
GOOGLE
GOOGLE
50
Building IBM Lotus Domino 8 Infrastructure
Versione:
Audience:
Amministratori di sistema Domino 8
Prerequisiti:
Fondamenti di amministrazione di Domino 8
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Installare e configurare una infrastruttura IBM Lotus Domino 8 e Lotus Notes 8 su
singolo dominio
• Configurare i servizi di posta e delle repliche
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installazione e configurazione del primo server Domino
Installazione e configurazione del primo server Domino
Installazione e configurazione del client di amministrazione
Creazione del database che traccia le licenze Notes e Domino
Configurazione di server Domino addizionali
Creazioni di certificatori addizionali per server ed utenti
Creazione di server ID
Aggiunta di utenti Notes al dominio Domino
Creazione di Notes ID per gli utenti
Installazione del client Notes
Configurazione della postazione Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di gruppi
- Configurazione ed uso delle Policy
Configurazione dell’ambiente di amministrazione
Preferenze di amministrazione
Controllo dell’accesso al server
Registrazione delle attività del server tramite il Log
Configurazione delle funzioni di replica per la sincronizzazione dei database di
sistema
Definizione di una strategia di replica
Creazione di gruppi di server per la replica
Schedulazione della replica
Controllo della replica
Configurazione delle funzioni di posta interne
Creazione di Reti Denominate Domino
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Trasferimento di posta tra Reti Denominate Domino
Schedulazione della posta
Configurazione della posta internet
Abilitazione del protocollo SMTP
Configurazione di base ed avanzate
Creazione di controlli sulla posta internet in entrata ed uscita
Abilitazione di controlli sulla posta
Controllo sulla dimensione dei messaggi
Creazione di “blacklist” e “whitelist”
Creazione di “Disclaimers”
Funzione di “Journaling”
AREA ICT - IBM
53
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di regole
Creazione e gestione delle quote sui database di posta
Archiviazione tramite Policy
Controllo sulla dimensione della cartella Posta in entrata
Abilitazione meccanismi di Monitoring
Abilitazione funzione di Tracking
Controllo delle statistiche
•
•
•
•
•
Abilitazione della funzione di Recall
Analisi dei più comuni problemi di posta
Connessione di posta
Ripartenza del Router di posta
Gestione della posta non consegnabile
IBM
IBM
52
AREA ICT - IBM
54
Building Web Applications with IBM Lotus
Domino Designer 8
Versione:
Developing IBM Lotus Domino 8 Applications:
Intermediate Skills
55
Versione:
Audience:
Sviluppatori avanzati di applicazioni Domino 8
Prerequisiti:
Fondamenti di Sviluppo Applicazioni in ambiente Lotus Domino 8
Prerequisiti:
Esperienza nello sviluppo di applicazioni Domino 8
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Disegnare e sviluppare applicazioni Web dinamiche
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Utilizzare le tecniche avanzate nell’uso delle formule (loop e interazioni utente)
• Accedere ai dati al di fuori del database di Domino corrente, sia altri database
Domino che database relazionali
• Aggiungere flussi di lavoro, controllare la sicurezza e la cifratura
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
• Uso del linguaggio formula per visualizzare e manipolare valori di testo e liste
• Implementare funzioni che interagiscono con gli utenti attraverso differenti tipo di
finestre di dialogo usando le funzioni @Prompt e @DialogBox
• Esaminare ed usare elementi di sviluppo come strutture di navigazione, includendo
link e mappe di immagini
• Creare ed inserire una Outline
• Aggiungere un Frameset all’applicazione, aggiungere contenuti ad un Frame,
includere elementi in un Frameset
• uso della funzione @DbColumn per accedere ai valori di documenti e viste; uso di @
PickList per permettere all’utente la scelta di valori da una vista; uso dei documenti
di profilo
• Uso del linguaggio formula per accedere a dati usando Open Database Connectivity
(ODBC)
• Esaminare Domino Enterprise Connection Services (DECS) ed implementare il
collegamento in tempo reale ad un database relazionale esterno
• Definire flussi di lavoro, creare mail-in database, spedire documenti a database
applicativi
• Controllare chi può modificare una sezione di un documento, allegare una firma ad
una sezione ad accesso controllato, cifrare dati
• Uso del linguaggio formula per manipolare valori di testo e liste ed usare funzioni
che premettono interazioni
• Esaminare ed usare elementi di sviluppo come strutture di navigazione, inclusi link e
mappe di immagini
IBM
Sviluppatori di applicazioni Domino 8
AREA ICT - IBM
Descrizione della pagina HTML e suo formato
Creazione di link Domino
Usare in maniera efficiente i campi nascosti
Uso dei fogli di stile CSS
Uso di HTML nelle viste
Controllare le interazioni dei frame
Uso di JavaScript nei Form
Personalizzazione delle funzionalità del sito Web
Uso di Java
Sicurezza delle applicazioni Domino per il Web
AREA ICT - IBM
IBM
Audience:
Versione:
Audience:
Sviluppatori di applicazioni Domino 8
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenze di base nell’uso del client Notes R8
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e modificare con successo applicazioni tramite Lotus Domino Designer 8
Durata:
4 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Panoramica sulle Applicazioni Domino
Identificazione delle tipologie di Applicazioni
Architettura Domino
Componenti di un'Applicazione Domino
Analisi delle funzioni di replica
Panoramica dell'ambiente di sviluppo Lotus Domino 8
Panoramica dell'interfaccia di Lotus Domino Designer 8
Accesso agli elementi di sviluppo
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di Database
Creazione di un nuovo database vuoto
Creazione di una copia di un database esistente
Creazione di un database tramite Modelli
Creazione di Pagine
Creazione di Pagine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Aggiunta di testo
Uso di tabelle
Aggiunta di immagini
Creazione di Moduli
Creazione di moduli
Aggiunta di campi
Nascondere elementi del modulo
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di Viste
Creazione di viste
Aggiunta di colonne
Organizzazione dei documenti
Formattazione delle viste
Introduzione alle Formule
Identificazione dei linguaggi supportati da Lotus Domino
Componenti del linguaggio Formula
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con @Functions
Uso di Formule nei Moduli
Creazione del titolo
Lavorare con i valori calcolati
Lavorare con i valori dei campi
Lavorare con le liste
AREA ICT - IBM
57
•
•
•
•
•
•
Richieste agli utenti
Uso di codice riusabile
Uso di Formule nelle Viste
Creazione di formule di selezione
Concatenazione di valori nelle colonne
Miglioramenti dei Moduli
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Uso del Livelli
Uso di Sottomoduli
Creazione di campi condivisi
Uso dell'ereditarietà in Moduli e Documenti
Abilitazione funzione "AutoSave"
Implementazione di Lotus Sametime nei Moduli
Miglioramenti delle Viste
Definizione di viste gerarchiche
Visualizzazione di documenti risposta
Implementazione di colonne condivise
Implementazione di Lotus Sametime nelle viste
Creazione di viste per il Web
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Uso delle Operazioni
Creazione di Operazioni
Creazione di Operazioni condivise
Controllare la visualizzazione delle Operazioni
Uso degli Agenti
Analisi degli agenti
Creazione di Agenti
La sicurezza nelle applicazioni
Analisi delle funzioni di sicurezza
Implementazione dei Ruoli
Uso dei campi Lettore e Autore
Controllo dell'accesso degli utenti Anonimi
Distribuzione delle applicazioni
IBM
IBM
56
Fundamentals of IBM Lotus Domino 8
Application Development
AREA ICT - IBM
Versione:
Lotus Notes 85 per Utenti
59
Versione:
Audience:
Amministratori di sistema Domino 8
Audience:
Utenti Lotus Notes, Sviluppatori di applicazioni Domino, Amministratori Domino
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenze di base nell’uso del client Notes 8
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di un sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Eseguire le attività di base in una infrastruttura Lotus Domino 8
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
2 giorni
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Gestire in autonomia le opzioni principali della posta elettronica in ambiente Lotus
Notes
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Esame dell’architettura Lotus Domino e Lotus Notes
Comprensione degli elementi chiave di un ambiente Domino
Lotus Notes e Domino
Database Domino
Applicazioni Composite
Directory
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attività amministrative di base:
Partenza client Domino Administrator
Uso dell’Help online
Panoramica di Domino Administrator
Configurazione preferenze di amministrazione
Meccanismi di sicurezza di Domino
Dominio Domino
Rete Denominata Domino
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Elementi di Lotus Notes
Area di lavoro Lotus Notes
Barre degli strumenti
Segnalibri: collegamenti a documenti, pagine e applicazioni preferite
Elementi di una vista
Home page
La barra laterale
Come ottenere la guida
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Certificatori
Notes ID
Certificati (Notes e X509)
Organizzazione Domino
Unita Organizzative
ACL
ECL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un messaggio
Indirizzamento della posta
Lettura della posta e controllo dei nuovi messaggi
Invio di un messaggio
Come specificare le opzioni di consegna della posta
Rispondere a un messaggio
Inoltro di un messaggio o di un documento
Come spostare o aggiungere la posta in una cartella
Creazione o eliminazione di una cartella
Gestione della posta con regole rapide
Eliminazione della posta
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Funzioni di messaggistica di Domino
Componenti della funzione di messaggistica
Protocolli supportati
Posta nella stessa Rete Denominata Domino
Posta tra Reti Denominate Domino
Funzioni di Replica
Le funzioni di replica di Domino
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configurare notifiche di assenza dall’ufficio
Archiviazione dei messaggi di posta
Creazione di una voce del diario
Modifica di una voce del diario
Impostazione della pianificazione del tempo disponibile
Creazione di un diario di gruppo
Visualizzazione di un diario di gruppo
Delega dell’accesso alla posta, al diario, all’elenco delle attività e ai contatti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Terminologia
Componenti
Funzioni addizionali
Clustering
Partitioning
Protocolli Internet supportati
Integrazione con altri prodotti IBM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di una nuova voce dei contatti
Aggiunta di voci di gruppo ai contatti
Delega dell’accesso ai propri contatti
Ricerca di informazioni
Uso di Notes off-line
Creazione di una copia off-line (replica)
Pianificazione delle repliche per una località
AREA ICT - IBM
IBM
IBM
58
IBM Lotus Domino 8 System Administration
Operating Fundamentals
AREA ICT - IBM
Versione:
Using LotusScript in IBM Lotus Domino 7
Applications
61
Versione:
Audience:
Amministratori di sistema Domino 8
Audience:
Sviluppatori di applicazioni Domino 8
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenze di base nell’uso nell’implementare una Infrastruttura Domino 8
Prerequisiti:
Esperienza nello sviluppo di applicazioni Domino 8
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• eseguire le attività standard di manutenzione dei server e risolvere le problematiche
più comuni
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Utilizzare le tecniche di programmazione LotusScript
• Accedere e lavorare con gli oggetti del Domino Object Model
Durata:
3 giorni
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione utenti e gruppi
Spostamento file di posta
Cambiamento nome utente
Ricertificazione user ID
Cancellazione utenti
Configurazione utenti roaming
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione gruppi
Gestione client Notes e non-Notes
Configurazione browser
Aggiornamento software Notes via Smart Upgrade
Le Applicazioni Composite
Conoscenza delle Applicazioni Composite
Configurazione Client Notes per l’accesso alle Applicazioni Composite su WebSphere
Portal Server
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione alle funzioni di “Provisioning” delle Applicazioni Composite
Gestione server
Definizione del processo di backup
Certificazione incrociata
Dismissione di un server
Modifica accessi amministrativi
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Strumenti di monitoring
Monitor delle risorse di sistema
Visualizzazione delle statistiche
Uso di Domino Web Administrator
Uso della console
Uso dei DDM (Domino Domain Monitoring
Creazione e configurazione di Probes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione dei problemi del server
Problemi di autenticazione
Problemi di replica
Problemi di connessione
Problemi degli agenti
Gestione dei problemi dei client
Problemi delle Workstation
Problemi sui database
Problemi di posta
AREA ICT - IBM
Introduzione a LotusScript: dove e quando usarlo
Dichiarazione di variabili
Assegnazione di valori
Uso dei cicli iterativi
Conversione dei tipi di dato
Leggere informazioni dal database
Uso del Debugger di LotusScript
Intercettare errori nel codice
• Uso delle classi di front-end per manipolare gli oggetti dell’interfaccia utente
• Uso delle classi di back-end per leggere, aggiungere e modificare i dati nei
documenti
• Creazione e spedizione di documenti
• Elaborare i dati immessi dall’utente
• Uso delle librerie di Script
AREA ICT - IBM
IBM
IBM
60
Managing IBM Lotus Domino 8 Servers and
Users
Architect Enterprise Applications with Java EE
Versione:
Audience:
63
Versione:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Audience:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Make good use of Java EE component technologies to solve typical problems in
system architecture
• Derive software systems using techniques outlined in the Java EE Blueprint and
solutions defined in the Java EE Patterns
• Address quality-of-service requirements in a cost-effective manner using
engineering trade-off techniques
• Describe the role of the architect and the products an architect delivers
• List and describe typical problems associated with large-scale enterprise systems
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introducing Enterprise Architecture
Introducing Fundamental Architectural Concepts
Developing a Security Architecture
Understanding Non-Functional Requirements
Defining Common Problems and Solutions: Risk Factors and System Flexibility
Defining Common Problems and Solutions: Network, Transaction and Capacity
Planning
•
•
•
•
•
•
Java EE 6 Overview
Developing an Architecture for the Client Tier
Developing an Architecture for the Web Tier
Developing an Architecture for the Business Tier
Developing an Architecture for the Integration and Resource Tiers
Evaluating the Software Architecture
AREA ICT - Java
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the application model for the Java EE platform and the context for the
model
• Select the correct Java EE Profile for a given application
• Develop and run an EJB technology application
• Develop basic Java Persistence API entity classes to enable database access
• Develop a web-based user interface using Servlets, JSPs, and JSF
• Develop simple web services for the Java EE platform
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Survey of Java EE Technologies
Enterprise Application Architecture
Web Technology Overview
Developing Servlets
Developing With JavaServer Pages Technology
JavaServer Faces
EJB Overview
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Implementing EJB 30 Session Beans
The Java Persistence API
Implementing a Transaction Policy
Developing Asynchronous Java EE Applications and Messaging
Developing Message-Driven Beans
Web Service Model
Implementing Java EE Web Services with JAX-WS and JAX-RS
Implementing a Security Policy
AREA ICT - Java
JAVA
JAVA
62
Developing Applications for the Java EE 6
Platform
Versione:
Audience:
Java ME Develop Applications for Mobile
Phones
65
Versione:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Audience:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Apply Model View Controller (MVC) design pattern to create reusable classes
• Implement unit testing using JUnit
• Implement a program from the ground up that could be used in a commercial
intranet application
• Develop classes to connect programs to Structured Query Language (SQL) database
systems using the core aspects of the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) (API)
• Organize and set up the GUI generation and event handling to support a Java
technology project
• Implement the Logging API to generate log messages in GUI
• Create two-tier and three-tier Java technology applications
• Create a multithreaded server
• Create remote objects using Java Remote Method Invocation (Java RMI)
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - Java
Introduce the BrokerTool Application
Apply the Model View Controller (MVC) Design Pattern
Implement Unit Testing
Design the BrokerTool Application
Implement the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) API
Create Graphical User Interfaces (GUI)
Handle GUI Events
Log Messages in GUI
Implement Multiple-Tier Design
Implement Advanced Multiple-Tier Design
Communicate With Remote Objects Using Java RMI
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Render HTML using LWUIT
• Write an application that uses location-based services such as GPS
• Create a Java ME MIDlet and run it on the emulator
• Create a custom LWUIT component
• Use the PushRegistry to register events such as alarms and connections
• Open and read from I/O connections
• Create a MIDP form and add basic components to it
• Use the MIDP canvas and write an application to paint on the canvas
• Create a game using Sprites and Layers
• Create a application to play audio from the mobile phone emulator
• Create applications using LWUIT components
• Use the LWUIT Resource Editor to apply a theme
• Use LWUIT list components
• Write a Payment application
• Use RMS to read and write files on a mobile device
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Course Overview and Introduction
MIDlets
CDLC Basics
Basic User Interfaces with Java ME
Low Level UI
Game API
Multimedia API
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LWUIT: Overview and Forms
LWUIT: Basic Components
LWUIT: Containers and Layouts
LWUIT: Adding Style
LWUIT: Resource Editor
LWUIT: List components
Custom LWUIT components
HTML in LWUIT
•
•
•
•
•
Location API
Payments API
Record Management Store
The MIDP 20 Push Registry
Advanced I/O
JAVA
JAVA
64
Developing Applications With the Java SE6
Platform
AREA ICT - Java
Java Performance Tuning and Optimization
Versione:
Audience:
Java SE7 Develop Rich Client Applications
67
Versione:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Audience:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Apply basic performance tuning principles to a Java application
• Monitor performance on Solaris, Linux and Windows at the OS/JVM/Application
level
• Profile the performance of a Java Application
• Tune the performance of a Java application at the language level
• Describe various garbage collection schemes
• Tune garbage collection in a Java application
• Apply best practices for performance testing
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - Java
Introduction to Java Performance Tuning
JVM and Performance Overview
Monitoring Operating System Performance
Monitoring the JVM
Performance Profiling
Garbage Collection Schemes
Garbage Collection Tuning
Language Level Concerns and Garbage Collection
Performance Tuning at the Language Level
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Implement a rich client application (RIA) from the ground up
• Create a JavaFX GUI using controls, layouts, charts, smart tables, and CSS
• Implement event handling in a JavaFX application
• Use JavaFX visual effects, animations, media, and a web view control in a JavaFX
application
• Implement concurrency and binding to a JavaFX application
• Leverage Java Persistence API (JPA) in a Java SE application
• Create two-tier and three-tier Java technology applications
• Connect your application to a REST web service
• Package and deploy a Java SE application
• Secure a Java SE application
• Sign a Java SE application
• Implement the Logging API to generate log messages in GUI
• Implement unit testing using JUnit
• Apply Model View Controller (MVC) design pattern to create reusable classes
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction
The Broker Tool Application
JavaFX Overview
Generics and JavaFX Collections
UI Controls, Layouts, Charts, and CSS
Visual Effects, Animation, Web View, and Media
JavaFX Tables and Client GUI
JavaFX Concurrency and Binding
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Java Persistence API (JPA)
Applying the JPA
Implementing a Multi-Tier Design with RESTful Web Services
Connecting to a RESTful Web Service
Packaging and Deploying Applications
Developing Secure Applications
Signing an Application and Authentication
Logging
Implementing Unit Testing and Using Version Control
JAVA
JAVA
66
AREA ICT - Java
Java SE7 Programming
Versione:
Audience:
69
Versione:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Java SE Performance Tuning
Audience:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Perform multiple operations on database tables, including creating, reading,
updating and deleting using JDBC technology
• Process strings using a variety of regular expressions
• Create high-performing multi-threaded applications that avoid deadlock
• Localize Java applications
• Create applications that use the Java Collections framework
• Implement error-handling techniques using exception handling
• Implement input/output (I/O) functionality to read from and write to data and text
files and understand advanced I/O streams
• Manipulate files, directories and file systems using the JDK7 NIO2 specification
• Apply common design patterns and best practices
• Create Java technology applications that leverage the object-oriented features of
the Java language, such as encapsulation, inheritance, and polymorphism
• Execute a Java technology application from the command line
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Java Platform Overview
Java Syntax and Class Review
Encapsulation and Polymorphism
Java Class Design
Advanced Class Design
Inheritance with Java Interfaces
Generics and Collections
String processing
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exceptions and Assertions
I/O Fundamentals
File I/O with NIO 2
Threading
Concurrency
Database Application with JDBC
Localization
AREA ICT - Java
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Examine and tune 64 bit JVMs
• Optimize the JVM for Multi-core platforms
• Incorporate monitoring, profiling and tuning into the application development life
cycle
• Monitor and Evaluate OS resource utilization
• Monitor Garbage Collector performance
• Monitor the Java Virtual Machine
• Profile Java applications
• Tune garbage collectors
• Tune Just in Time compilers
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Examine Performance tuning
Monitor and Evaluate OS Resource Utilization
Monitor and Evaluate JVM Performance
Profile Java Applications
Tune garbage collectors
Tune Just in Time (JIT) compilers
Use 64 bit JVM’s
Optimize the JVM for Multi-core platforms
JAVA
JAVA
68
AREA ICT - Java
Java SE7 Fundamentals
Versione:
Audience:
Versione:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
71
Audience:
Java Developers
Prerequisiti:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Develop classes and describe how to declare a class
• Analyze a business problem in order to recognize objects and operations that form
the building blocks of the Java program design
• Define the term
• Demonstrate Java programming syntax
• Write a simple Java program that compiles and runs successfully
• Declare and initialize variables
• List several primitive data types
• Instantiate an object and effectively use object reference variables
• Use operators, loops, and decision constructs
• Declare and instantiate Arrays and ArrayLists and be able to iterate through them
• Describe the benefits of using an Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
• List and describe several key features of the Java technology
• Declare a method with arguments and return values
• Use inheritance to declare and define a subclass of an existing superclass
• Describe how errors are handled in a Java program
• Describe examples of how Java is used in applications, as well as consumer products
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - Java
Introducing the Java Technology
Thinking in Objects
Introducing the Java Language
Working with Primitive Variables
Working with Objects
Using operators and decision constructs
Creating and Using Arrays
Using Loop Constructs
Working with Methods and Method Overloading
Using Encapsulation and Constructors
Introducing Advanced Object Oriented Concepts
Handling Errors
The Big Picture
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the object-oriented software development process, including objectoriented methodologies and workflows
• Gather system requirements through interviews with stakeholders
• Analyze system requirements to determine the use cases and domain model of the
problem domain (the Requirements model)
• Create a system architecture (the Architecture model) supporting the nonfunctional
requirements (NFRs) and development constraints
• Create a system design (the Solution model) supporting the functional requirements
(FRs)
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Examining Object-Oriented Concepts and Terminology
Introducing Modeling and the Software Development Process
Creating Use Case Diagrams
Creating Use Case Scenarios and Forms
Creating Activity Diagrams
Determining the Key Abstractions
Constructing the Problem Domain Model
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transitioning from Analysis to Design using Interaction Diagrams
Modeling Object State Using State Machine Diagrams
Applying Design Patterns to the Design Model
Introducing Architectural Concepts and Diagrams
Introducing the Architectural Tiers
Refining the Class Design Model
Overview of Software Development Processes
Overview of Frameworks
AREA ICT - Java
JAVA
JAVA
70
Object-Oriented Analysis and Design Using
UML
ASP
73
Versione:
Audience:
Sviluppatori web
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenze di HTML e logica di programmazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Utilizzare il linguaggio di scripting VB Script per creare semplici applicazioni web
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione al web scripting
• Microsoft ASP
• Altri linguaggi di scripting
•
•
•
•
Introduzione ad ASP
La tecnologia ASP
Integrazione di ASP e HTML
Oggetti, proprietà, metodi e collezioni
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione al linguaggio VB Script
Le variabili
Le costanti
Gli operatori
I commenti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gli oggetti built-in di ASP
L'oggetto Response
L'oggetto Request
L'oggetto Server
L'oggetto Session
L'oggetto Application
•
•
•
•
•
•
Altri elementi di ASP
SSI - Server Side Include
Il file Globalasa
Gestione degli errori e dei cookie
ActiveX e delle DLL
Gli oggetti MSWC
•
•
•
•
Interazione con i form HTML
GET e POST
Gestione degli elementi dei form HTML
Recupero delle informazioni dai form HTML
• Le condizioni in VBScript
• If - Then - Else
• Select Case
•
•
•
•
•
•
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
72
Le iterazione in VBScript
For - Next
While - Wend
Do While - Loop
For Each - Next
Uscita da un ciclo
• Creazione e gestione degli array
• Le funzioni
• Funzioni personalizzate
• Funzioni parametrizzate
•
•
•
•
•
•
Funzioni di tipo data
Funzioni di tipo stringa
Funzioni numeriche
Funzioni di formattazione
Funzioni di conversione
Funzioni di verifica
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
ASPNET
Fogli di stile - CSS
75
Sviluppare pagine web con i fogli di stile
Versione:
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Sviluppatori web avanzati
Audience:
Sviluppatori di siti web
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenze di HTML e basi di ASP
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di HTML
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Sviluppare un’applicazione ASPNET
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
3 giorni
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare un progetto completo di un sito web utilizzando i fogli di stile per la
formattazione e il layout delle pagine
Contenuti
• Introduzione al corso
• Differenze tra applicazione ASP ed applicazione ASPNET
• Scrittura un' applicazione in ASP e in ASPNET
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione ai fogli di stile e la normativa italiana riguardo l’accessibilità del siti web
•
•
•
•
Struttura di un'application page
Codice e dati
Creazione di Web Controls
Esempi e sviluppo di un progetto
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configurazione di un progetto Web
Il file configweb
Gestione e sicurezza in ASPNET
Tipologie di autenticazioni
Autorizzazioni e identità
Architettura di un Web Service
Chiamare il client
Analisi del file Service Descriptor Language (SDL)
Analisi del supporto fornito agli Web Services da parte di Visual Studio NET
Gestione dello stato
Security all’interno degli Web Services
•
•
•
•
•
Opzioni accessi ai dati di Microsoft: ODBC e OLE DB
Introduzione ad ADONET
L’oggetto DataSet
RecordSet di ADO e DataSet di ADONET
Esempi di accesso ai dati con ADONET
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
• Strumenti per realizzare CSS
• Pregi e difetti dei fogli di stile
• Uso e proprietà dei font
• Link ed elenchi
• Colori e sfondi
• I margini e bordi
• Dimensioni
• Fogli di stile multipli
• Accessibilità ed usabilità
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
74
• Compatibilità con i browser
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
HTML - base
Versione:
Audience:
Operatori ICT
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo, con le applicazioni di office automation più comuni
e basi di grafica
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Comprendere lo standard HTML
• Comprendere la struttura di una pagina web
• Associare L’HTML della pagina web ai fogli di stile
• Gestire la grafica e testo con L’HTML
• Creare link e mappe immagine
• Gestire tabelle e frame
• Gestire i form
• Inserire filmati e audio
77
•
•
•
•
I frame
Definizione di un frame
Attributi di un frame
Impaginazione tramite i CSS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
I form o moduli
Struttura dei form
Tag e pulsanti
Inserire campi di testo
Inserire pulsanti di scelta
Campi nascosti e di tipo file
Inviare i dati ad un server
Inserire elementi multimediali
Inserire audio e video
Inserire filmati Flash
Inserire oggetti Java
Composizione finale della pagina
Meta tag
I DTD
Pubblicare il sito tramite FTP
Durata:
3 giorni
•
•
•
•
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Introduzione all’HTML
Scelta dell’editor
Funzionamento dei browser
Lo standard W3C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Progettazione di una pagina HTML
Cartelle e file
CSS
Lo sfondo, margini e lingua
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
76
• Struttura di una pagina HTML
• Tag
• Commenti
•
•
•
•
Inserimento e gestione del testo
Titoli e paragrafi
Blocchi di testo e contenitori
Formattazione del testo
•
•
•
•
Ipertesti
Principi dell’ipertestualità
Link
Gli attributi dei link
• Inserimento e gestione di immagini
• Mappe immagini
•
•
•
•
Le tabelle
Strutturazione delle informazioni in tabelle
Attributi delle tabelle
Attribuire un layout alle pagine tramite le tabelle
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
HTML - avanzato
Versione:
Linguaggio C
79
Versione:
Audience:
Operatori ICT, sviluppatori web
Audience:
Sviluppatori software
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza di HTML
Prerequisiti:
Basi di logica della programmazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Incorporare applet Java e controlli ActiveX
• Incorporare script nella pagina HTML e codificare script Javascript semplici
• Utilizzare il modello d’oggetto del browser e del documento per una maggiore
interattività della pagina HTML
• Utilizzare le funzionalità e le tecniche di codifica DHTML per realizzare pagine HTML
dinamiche
• Descrivere le principali tecnologie di accesso ai database
• Includere dati dinamici nelle pagine HTML
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Comprendere la struttura di un programma C
• Scrivere programmi in linguaggio C
Durata:
5 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Inserire componenti attivi in HTML
• Inserire Applet Java
• Inserire controlli ActiveX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lo scripting in HTML
Introduzione ai linguaggi di scripting
Il modello di oggetto del browser e del documento HTML
Inserire JavaScript nel codice HTML
Interpretare gli elementi del linguaggio JavaScript
Realizzare un gestore d’evento in JavaScript
L’oggetto Event
Piccolo laboratorio di JavaScript
Panoramica sui linguaggi di programmazione
Caratteristiche del linguaggio C
Il preprocessore, compilazione condizionale, macro
Tipi dati fondamentali e dichiarazioni
Operazioni ed espressioni Operatori logici e relazionali
Strutture di controllo: condizionali e iterative
Le funzioni, la definizione, i prototipi, la ricorsione
Array e puntatori
Strutture e unioni
La libreria standard, funzioni sulle stringhe, funzioni di I/O
Uso degli ambienti di sviluppo
Classi di memorizzazione degli oggetti
Visibilità degli oggetti
Funzioni per l'allocazione dinamica
Produzione di esempi
• Utilizzo dei fogli di stile
• La sintassi CSS
• Utilizzare fogli di stile CSS in pagine HTML
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HTML dinamico (DHTML)
Browser a confronto nella gestione DHTML
Posizionare i contenuti HTML con la sintassi CSSP
Cambiare dinamicamente la pagina con DHTML
Stili dinamici
Posizionamento dinamico
Contenuti dinamici
•
•
•
•
•
•
Accesso a basi dati dal Web
Tecnologie client-side
Cenni alle tecnologie server-side:
Microsoft Active Server Pages (ASP)
Microsoft ActiveX Data Objects (ADO)
Java Database Connectivity (JDBC)
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
78
80
Linguaggio C++
Versione:
Object-Oriented
81
Versione:
Analisti e sviluppatori software
Audience:
Analisti e sviluppatori di software
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza del linguaggio C
Prerequisiti:
Basi di logica della programmazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Disegnare ed implementare semplici classi C++
• Scrivere semplici programmi C++
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Applicare la metodologia imparata per costruire una soluzione “Object-Oriented”
Durata:
5 giorni
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
• Estensioni al C, classi, ereditarietà, protezione, costruttori e distruttori
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
L’approccio Object Oriented
I concetti fondamentali dell'approccio OO
Tipi di dati astratti
Classi
Ereditarietà
Polimorfismo
Binding dinamico
Metodi e messaggi
Vantaggi dell'OO e confronto con l'approccio strutturato
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analisi Object Oriented
Modelli per lo sviluppo del software
Oggetti: identificazione e descrizione
Classi: gerarchie e responsabilità
Metodi
Attributi delle classi
Object diagrams
Messaggi
Relazioni fra classi
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dynamic modeling
Stati, eventi ed operazioni
Diagrammi di transizione di stato
Diagrammi degli eventi
Creazione di un diagramma degli eventi
Diagrammi process dependency
Diagrammi object flow
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disegno Object Oriented
Affinamento del modello ad oggetti
Sviluppo degli oggetti
Modifica del modello ad oggetti
Documentazione del design
Validazione e criteri di disegno
Gestione di database ad oggetti
Disegno dell’interfaccia utente
• Memoria dinamica, templates, referenze, funzioni inline, overloading degli operatori
• Funzioni virtuali, eccezioni, friends, static, const, conversione di tipi
• Collezioni di classi
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
• Disegno e realizzazione di programmi Object Oriented
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
Audience:
82
Perl
PHP
Versione:
83
Versione:
Audience:
Sistemisti o programmatori in ambiente Unix, gestori di siti Web dinamici
Audience:
Sviluppatori e gestori di siti web
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Basi di logica della programmazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Scrivere procedure eseguibili in linguaggio Perl
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
4 giorni
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare pagine web dinamiche, interagendo con database relazionali, quali Access e
MySql
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Durata:
4 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione a PHP
• Confronto con altri linguaggi Server side
•
•
•
•
Installazione e caratteristiche principali
Server web Apache e IIS
Installazione e configurazione di un DBMS MySQL in un server
Installazione e configurazione dell’ambiente di sviluppo di PHP con EasyPHP-MySQL
•
•
•
•
Creazione e gestione di un file con PHP
Leggere, scrivere e cancellare un file
Usare i Form
Progettare un database
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestire le informazioni
Struttura/Sintassi del Linguaggio
Definizione di Costanti e Variabili
Tipizzazioni di variabili
Istruzioni condizionali
Cicli di controllo
•
•
•
•
•
Strutture dati
Definire una struttura complessa
Inserire e modificare i dati in una struttura complessa
Operazioni di intereazione tra elementi di diverse strutture complesse di dati
Indici e ricerche
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Funzioni
Funzioni definite dall’utente
Funzioni con parametri
Valori restituiti
Funzioni per la gestione delle stringhe
Funzioni per la gestione delle strutture complesse di dati
Le funzioni per la gestione delle date
Funzioni per Invio di email in PHP
• Funzioni variabili
• Funzioni Apache
• Memorizzazione delle Informazioni
• Cookies e sessioni
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
Evoluzione del linguaggio Perl
Utilizzo di variabili, array, funzioni native
Gli operatori
I metacaratteri e I modificatori
Gestione files e I/Oistema
Interfacciamento con funzioni di sistema
Gestione di subroutine
Utilizzo di librerie
Gestione di segnali ed errori
Generazione di rapporti
UML
84
SQL e MySql
I database relazionali
Operatività con i dati
Operatività con le tabelle
Query
Backup dei dati
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interazione tra PHP e i database
Gestione della connessione
Form e PHP
Prelevare le informazioni dell’utente da un form
Usare i metodi Get e Post
Gestire la sicurezza dei Dati
Spedire il contenuto di un form a un database o per posta elettronica
Creare aree riservate con password in PHP e MySQL
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
Versione:
Audience:
Analisti e sviluppatori di software
Prerequisiti:
Nozioni di software engineering, basi della programmazione ad oggetti
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Analizzare un sistema ad oggetti
• Disegnare applicazioni utilizzando la metodologia UML
Durata:
5 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Concetti base di OOAD con UML
Il processo tradizionale di OOAD
Analisi e Disegno di sistemi software complessi
Introduzione all’UML
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
L’approccio Object Oriented
I concetti fondamentali dell'approccio Object Oriented
Tipi di dati astratti
Classi
Ereditarietà
Polimorfismo
Binding dinamico
Metodi e messaggi
Vantaggi dell' Object Oriented e confronto con l'approccio strutturato
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analisi Object Oriented
Modelli per lo sviluppo del software
Oggetti: identificazione e descrizione
Classi: gerarchie e responsabilità
Metodi
Attributi delle classi
Messaggi
Relazioni fra classi
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modellazione di sistemi complessi
UML come linguaggio per la modellazione di sistemi complessi
Identificazione delle classi
Modellazione del comportamento di un sistema: diagrammi dei casi d’uso,
diagramma delle attività, diagrammi delle interazioni e diagramma degli stati
Modellazione strutturale: diagramma delle classi e diagramma degli oggetti
Modellazione dell’architettura di un sistema: diagramma delle componenti e
diagramma del rilascio
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
•
•
•
•
•
•
85
Visual Basic
Versione:
Audience:
Sviluppatori software
Prerequisiti:
Basi di programmazione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Sviluppare semplici moduli in Visual Basic
Durata:
5 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione
Tipi di controlli
Standard, Custom e Insertable Control
Proprietà dei Controlli
VBX e OCX
•
•
•
•
•
Sviluppo di moduli
Form, Class, Standard
Resource Files
Eventi
Drag and Drop
• DLL e Windows API
• gestione di classi e oggetti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Custom Dialog
Predifined Dialog
Common Dialog
Applicazione MDI
Creazione di menu
ControlBar
• L’accesso ai dati
• Stampe e reports
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
Web e posta elettronica
87
Versione:
A scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Utenti finali che desiderano apprendere i concetti base della navigazione Internet e della
gestione base della posta elettronica
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Navigare in autonomia sul web
• Accedere e fruire dei diversi contenuti (testi, immagini, video, musica)
• Effettuare operazioni di base interattive (ricerche, salvataggio ed esportazioni di
dati, stampa)
• Creare e gestire in modo semplice un account di posta elettronica
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Concetti e termini base di Internet
• Navigare attraverso i browser più comuni
• Impostazione del browser
• Esplorazione dei contenuti
• Multimedialità e interattività dei contenuti
• Motori di ricerca
• Preferiti e salvataggio delle informazioni
• La sicurezza dei dati e della navigazione
• Stampa dei contenuti
• La posta elettronica
• Account sul web e lettura dei messaggi sul computer
• Uso di Outlook Express per l’invio e la ricezione dei messaggi
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
86
XML
89
Versione:
Audience:
Sviluppatori web
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza di HTLM
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Descrivere i Markup Language e le loro caratteristiche
• Confrontare SGML, HTML, XML
• usare i DTD (Document Type Definition) e gli schemi
• Creare ed utilizzare fogli di stile CSS
• Creare ed utilizzare fogli di stile XSL
• Descrivere gli Xlink
• Integrare XML con ASP e ADO
• Creare alcune applicazioni basate su XML
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione a XML
• Definizione di Markup Language
• Storia e scopi di XML
•
•
•
•
•
Struttura e sintassi di XML
Struttura logica
Struttura fisica
Lavorare con le regole
Spazi dei nomi
•
•
•
•
•
•
La validazione dei documenti
Validazione con i DTD (Document Type Definition)
Lavorare all’interno di una DTD
Creare una DTD
DTD esterne e classi
Validazione di XLM con Schemas
• Applicazioni XML
• Tipi di applicazioni
• Creazione di alcune applicazioni
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
LINGUAGGI E SVILUPPO
88
• Fogli di stile
• Introduzione ai fogli di stile
• Utilizzo di CSS nei documenti XML
•
•
•
•
•
Fogli di stile XSL (Extensible Stylesheet Language)
XSL: concetti base delle trasformazioni
Associazione fra modelli ed elementi
Formattazione per i browser (con HTML e CSS)
Filtri, ordinamenti e costrutti XSL-T
• Integrazione di XML con ASP
• Integrazione di XML con ADO
•
•
•
•
XML ed i collegamenti
Principi e scopi di Xlink
Collegamenti e puntatori in XML
Collegamenti semplici ed estesi
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
AREA ICT - Linguaggi e sviluppo
Exchange Server
91
Configuring, Managing and Troubleshooting Microsoft Exchange
Server 2010
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for people aspiring to be enterprise-level messaging
administrators Others who may take this course include IT generalists and help desk
professionals who want to learn about Exchange Server 2010
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Fundamental knowledge of network technologies including Domain Name System
(DNS) and firewall technologies
• Experience with the Windows Server 2003 and Microsoft Windows Server 2008
operating systems
• Experience with Active Directory directory services in Windows Server 2003 or AD
DS Windows Server 2008
• Experience managing backup and restore on Windows Servers
• Experience using Windows management and monitoring tools such as Microsoft
Management Console, Active Directory Users and Computers, Performance Monitor,
Event Viewer, and Internet Information Services (IIS) Administrator
• Experience using Windows networking and troubleshooting tools such as Network
Monitor, Telnet, and NSLookup
• Fundamental knowledge of certificates and Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)
• Basic experience with Windows Mobile
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Install and deploy Exchange Server 2010
• Configure Mailbox servers and Mailbox server components
• Manage recipient objects
• Configure the Client Access server role
• Manage message transport
• Configure the secure flow of messages between the Exchange Server organization
and the Internet
• Implement a high availability solution for Mailbox servers and other server roles
• Plan and implement backup and restore for the server roles
• Plan and configure messaging policy and compliance
• Configure Exchange Server permissions and security for internal and external access
• Monitor and maintain the messaging system
• Transition an Exchange Server 2003 or Exchange Server 2007 organization to
Exchange Server 2010
• Configure the Unified Messaging server role and Unified Messaging components
• Implement High Availability across multiple sites and implement Federated Sharing
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Managing Message Transport
• Managing Client Access
• Managing Recipient Objects
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuring Messaging Policy and Compliance
Securing Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
Maintaining Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
Upgrading from Exchange Server 2003 or Exchange Server 2007 to Exchange
• Server 2010
• Implementing Unified Messaging
• Advanced Topics in Exchange Server 2010
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
90
Configuring Mailbox Servers
Managing Message Transport
Implementing Messaging Security
Implementing High Availability
Implementing Backup and Recovery
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Exchange Server
Exchange Server
Core Solutions of Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
Versione:
Audience:
93
Designing and Deploying Messaging Solutions with Microsoft
Exchange Server 2010
Versione:
The primary audience for this course is Information Technology (IT) professionals who
are aspiring to be enterprise-level messaging administrators Others who may take
this course include IT generalists and help desk professionals who want to learn about
Exchange Server 2013 Administrators coming into the course are expected to have at
least 3 years of experience working in the IT field—typically in the areas of network
administration, help desk, or system administration They are not expected to have
experience with previous Exchange Server versions
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Minimum of two years of experience administering Windows Server, including
Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012
• Minimum of two years of experience working with Active Directory Domain Services
(AD DS)
• Minimum of two years of experience working with name resolution, including DNS
• Experience working with certificates, including PKI certificates
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan and perform deployment and management of Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
• Plan a Mailbox server deployment and configure the Mailbox server role
• Create and manage various recipient objects in Exchange Server 2013
• Plan and deploy Client Access servers
• Plan and configure client connectivity to Exchange Server 2013 Client Access server
• Plan and configure message transport
• Plan and implement high availability
• Plan and implement disaster recovery for Exchange Server 2013
• Plan and configure message security options
• Plan and configure administrative security and administrative auditing
• Monitor and troubleshoot Exchange Server 2013
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Deploying and Managing Exchange Server 2013
Audience:
This course is intended for people aspiring to be enterprise-level messaging
administrators Others who may take this course include IT generalists and help desk
professionals who want to learn about Exchange Server 2010
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• At least two years of experience working with Microsoft Exchange Server
• At least six months of experience working with Exchange Server 2010 or Exchange
Server 2007
• At least two years of experience administering the Windows Server operating
system, including Windows Server 2008
• At least two years of experience working with Active Directory Domain Services (AD
DS)
• At least two years of experience working with name resolution, including DNS
• Experience working with certificates, including Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)
certificates
• Experience working with the Windows PowerShell command-line interface
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Gather the information required to design a messaging system
• Design the integration of Exchange Server with the current infrastructure
• Design the deployment of the Mailbox server services in Exchange Server 2010
• Design the Client Access server deployment
• Design the Hub Transport server and Edge Transport server deployments
• Plan and deploy messaging security
• Plan and deploy a messaging policy and compliance solution
• Plan a highly available Exchange Server 2010 deployment
• Plan a disaster recovery solution in Exchange Server 2010
• Develop a plan for monitoring and troubleshooting the Exchange Server
environment
• Plan and implement a transition from Exchange Server 2003 or Exchange Server
2007 to Exchange Server 2010
• Integrate Exchange Server 2010 with other messaging systems and with federated
partners
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Introduction to Designing a Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Deployment
• Designing Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Integration with the Current
Infrastructure
• Planning and Deploying Mailbox Services
• Planning and Deploying Client Access Services in Exchange Server 2010
• Planning and Deploying Message Transport in Exchange Server 2010
• Planning and Deploying Messaging Security
• Planning and Deploying Messaging Compliance
• Planning and Deploying High Availability
• Planning a Disaster Recovery Solution
• Planning Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Monitoring and Troubleshooting
• Upgrading to Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
• Integrating Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 with Other Messaging Systems
• Module 2: Planning and Configuring Mailbox Servers
• Module 3: Managing Recipient Objects
• Module 4: Planning and Deploying Client Access Servers
• Module 5: Planning and Configuring Messaging Client Connectivity
• Module 6: Planning and Configuring Message Transport
• Module 7: Planning and Implementing High Availability
• Module 8: Planning and Implementing Disaster Recovery
• Module 9: Planning and Configuring Message Security Options
• Module 10: Planning and Configuring Administrative Security and Auditing
• Module 11: Monitoring and Troubleshooting Exchange Server 2013
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
92
Exchange Server
Introduction to Installing and Managing Microsoft Exchange Server
2007
Versione:
95
Planning, Deploying, and Managing Microsoft Exchange Server 2010
Unified Messaging
Versione:
Audience:
IT Professionals, IT generalists, and help desk professionals who want to learn about
Exchange Server 2007 are the audience for this course IT Professionals, IT generalists
and help desk professionals should have at least 3 years experience working in
the IT field—typically in the areas of network administration, help desk, or system
administration No experience with Exchange Server is necessary
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Working knowledge of Windows Server operating system For example, how storage
is configured, basic backup and restore techniques, and what a client/server
application interaction means
• Working knowledge of network technologies For example, what Transmission
Control Protocol (TCPIP) and Domain Name System (DNS) do and how to use them,
basic routing concepts (Wide Area Networks (WAN) vs Local Area Network (LAN)
router vs switch vs hub)
• Working knowledge of Active Directory For example, how user objects are managed,
what is stored in Active Directory partitions, basic architectures (domain, forest,
sites, etc), and how domain controllers are managed Also, site and site connector
configuration, schema and configuration partitions, and Global Catalogs
• Conceptual understanding of e-mail technologies For example, that Simple Mail
Transport Protocol (SMTP) is a protocol used for e-mail and the differences between
transport protocols and client access protocols (Post Office Protocol (POP), Internet
Access Message Protocol (IMAP), SMTP)
Obiettivi
formativi:
Exchange Server
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe how Exchange Server 2007 and the Active Directory directory service work
together
• Install Exchange Server 2007
• Configure Mailbox server roles
• Manage recipient objects
• Manage e-mail and address lists
• Manage client access
• Manage Messaging Transport
• Manage availability, backup and recovery
• Maintain the messaging system
Audience:
This course is intended for customers who have a prior understanding of Exchange
Server 2007 Unified Messaging features and functionality The course is also targeted
at early adopters of Exchange Server 2010 who need information on new features,
deployment concerns, prerequisites, and best practices
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• A thorough understanding of Exchange Server 2007 Unified Messaging features and
functionality
• An understanding of how to install and setup the Exchange Server 2010 Unified
Messaging role
• General familiarity with Office Communications Server 2007 R2
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Make use of the new features available in Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging
• Identify Unified Messaging deployment planning concerns, including prerequisites
and deployment scenarios
• Describe the considerations involved in deploying an Exchange Server 2010 Unified
Messaging solution
• Determine which deployment type best suits their organization’s requirements and
understand its impact on deployment tasks and processes
• Configure Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging components
• Implement Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging features and policies
• Use Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging tools
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Overview of Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging
• Module 2: Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging Architecture
• Module 3: Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging Setup and Language Support
• Module 4: Upgrading Exchange Server 2007 to Exchange Server 2010 Unified
Messaging
• Module 5: Call Answering Rules
• Module 6: Voice Mail Preview
Durata:
3 days
• Module 7: Protected Voice Mail
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Module 8: Message Waiting Indicator
Overview of Exchange and Active Directory
Installing Exchange Server 2007
Configuring Mailbox Server Roles
Managing Recipient Objects
Managing E-Mail Addresses and Address Lists
Managing Client Access
Managing Messaging Transport
Managing Availability, Backup and Recovery
Maintaining the Messaging System
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
• Module 9: Faxing with Exchange Server 2010 Unified Messaging
• Module 10: Integrating Office Communications Server 2007 R2 with Exchange
Server 2010 Unified Messaging
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
94
Lync Server
97
Core Solutions of Microsoft Lync Server 2013
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for IT consultants and telecommunications consulting
professionals who design, plan, deploy, and maintain solutions for unified
communications (UC) Candidates should be able to translate business requirements into
technical architecture and design for a UC solution
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Experience managing software in a Windows 2008 R2 enterprise server or Windows
Server 2012 environment
• Experience managing an application remotely using Windows PowerShell 30
• Familiarity with managing and configuring databases
• An introduction to Active Directory Domain Services
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the overall server and client Lync Server 2013 architecture
• Describe Lync 2013 features and user scenarios
• Describe the Lync Server deployment process
• Describe the components of a Lync Server 2013 Design
• Plan for Microsoft Solutions Framework for Lync 2013
• Plan Infrastructure Requirements for Lync Server 2013
• Use the Lync Server 2013 Planning Tool
• Use Topology Builder
• Plan for Site Topology
• Design a Site Topology
• Plan the Server Infrastructure
• Design Documentation Using Microsoft Office
• Use Lync Server 2013 management interfaces
• Configure Role-Based Access Control
• Prepare for client deployment
• Deploy and manage clients
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Durata:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configure the Archiving and Monitoring services
Describe and use the Lync Server 2013 troubleshooting tools
Describe the required daily, weekly, and monthly maintenance tasks
Describe the fundamental troubleshooting approach to Lync Server 2013 issues
Use SIP commands and analyze SIP logs
Describe high availability in Lync Server 2013
Configure High Availability features in Lync Server 2013
Plan for load balancing in Lync Server 2013
Design load balancing in Lync Server 2013
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Describe the high availability options in Lync Server 2013
Describe the tools for backing up and restoring Lync Server 2013 data
Backup and restore critical Lync Server 2013 data
Export and import critical Lync Server 2013 data
Describe design considerations for branch site scenarios
Describe the migration process
Describe migration and coexistence topologies
Plan for client and device migration
Design a software deployment strategy for Lync 2013
5 days
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
96
Prepare for device deployment
Deploy and manage Internet Protocol (IP) phones
Describe conferencing in Lync Server 2013
Describe dial-in conferencing in Lync Server 2013
Manage and administer dial-in conferencing in Lync Server 2013
Describe the conferencing capabilities of Lync Server 2013
Design audio and video for web conferencing
Plan for instant message and presence Federation
Design Edge services
Describe the features and concepts for Persistent Chat in Lync Server 2013
Design Lync Server 2013 to include Persistent Chat
Deploy and configure Persistent chat in Lync Server 2013
Describe the Archiving service
Describe the Monitoring service
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Lync Server
99
Planning and Designing a Microsoft Lync Server 2010 Solution
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Module 5: Designing a Mediation Server Topology
The audience for this course is information technology (IT) professionals who are
experienced on Lync Server 2010 technologies and who have a Technical Specialist
certification on the course, Configuring and Managing Microsoft Lync Server 2010, or
equivalent knowledge Students taking this course are expected to have experience
in hands-on deployment and day-to-day management of Unified Communications
technologies for enterprise organizations
The students should have experience in core Lync Server 2010 technology with specialist
skills in:
• Features and architecture
• Dial plans
• External User Access and Federation
• Security
• High Availability
• Load Balancing
• Resiliency
• Capacity
• Bandwidth management
• Central and Branch Office Sites
• Enterprise Voice
• Call Management
• Audio/Web/Dial-in Conferencing
• Topology options including services, server roles, colocation and geographical
placement
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the Lync Server 2010 design process
• Design a Lync Server 2010 topology
• Design for conferencing and external scenarios
• Design for load balancing
• Design voice infrastructure
• Design a Mediation Server topology
• Create a network design for Lync Server 2010
• Design Response Group Services
• Design for Location Services
• Design Exchange Unified Messaging Integration with Lync Server 2010
• Design for resiliency
• Design for backup and disaster recovery
• Design for monitoring and archiving
• Plan a migration to Lync Server 2010
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of the Lync Server 2010 Design Process
Module 6: Designing Voice Infrastructure
Module 7: Creating a Network Design for Lync Server 2010
Module 8: Designing Response Group Services
Module 9: Designing Location Services in Lync Server 2010
Module 10: Designing Exchange Server Unified Messaging Integration with Lync Server
2010
Module 11: Designing Resiliency
Module 12: Designing Backup and Disaster Recovery
Module 13: Designing Monitoring and Archiving
Module 14: Planning a Migration to Lync Server 2010
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
98
Module 2: Designing a Lync Server 2010 Topology
Module 3: Designing for Conferencing and External Scenarios
Module 4: Planning and Designing Load Balancing
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Office 365 - Novità 2013
Private Cloud
Microsoft Jump Start - Office 365 for IT Professionals
Versione:
101
Configuring and Deploying a Private Cloud with System Center 2012
Versione:
Audience:
This course is designed for experienced IT Professionals, IT Decision Makers, Network
Administrators, Microsoft customers and partners who need to determine how to best
leverage the cloud.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Knowledge and proficiency with the following Microsoft technologies
• Active Directory Domain Services and Federation Services (ADFS) 2.0; DNS;
PowerShell
• Microsoft Exchange 2010/2007/20032000 ; SharePoint Server 2010/2007
• Microsoft Office Communications Server 2007 Or Microsoft Lync Server 2010
• Microsoft Office 2010/2007; Microsoft Internet Explorer (and other browsers)
Windows Update/Microsoft Update; Windows Phone and mobility
Obiettivi
formativi:
At the end of this course, students will:
• Understand Key components of Microsoft Office 365
• Know the deployment models
• Understand key elements of automation using PowerShell
• Know how to use Directory Sync
• Differentiate key functionality for Microsoft Exchange Online, SharePoint Online and
Lync Online
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Office 365 Overview
Audience:
Data center administrators responsible for designing, installing and configuring a private
cloud infrastructure
Prerequisiti:
Because this is an extensive technical domain that includes several individual products
and technologies, it is strongly recommended administrators have prerequisite
knowledge in the following areas:
• Windows Server 2008 R2 experience
• Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) knowledge
• Networking experience
• Working knowledge of previous versions of System Center products
• Knowledge of configuration of Microsoft SharePoint
• Hyper-V knowledge
• Knowledge of data center management processes
• Storage Area Network (SAN) Knowledge
Obiettivi
formativi:
Because this is an extensive technical domain that includes several individual products
and technologies, it is strongly recommended administrators have prerequisite
knowledge in the following areas:
• Windows Server 2008 R2 operating system
• Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS)
• Microsoft SharePoint
• Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V
• Networking and storage experience
• Familiarity with data center management processes
• Previous work with IT Infrastructure Library (ITIL)
• Previous work with Microsoft Operations Framework (MOF)
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Planning for the Private Cloud
• Module 2: Deploying Clients for Microsoft Office 365
• Module 3: Microsoft Office 365 Administration and Automation Using Windows
PowerShell
• Module 4: Microsoft Office 365 Identity and Access Solutions
• Module 5: Microsoft Office 365 Directory Synchronization
• Module 6: Using Directory Sync
Module 2: Configuring and Deploying the Private Cloud with System Center 2012
-Virtual Machine Manager
• Module 7: Microsoft Exchange Online Administration
Module 3: Extending and Maintaining the Private Cloud Infrastructure
• Module 8: Microsoft Staged Exchange Online Migration
Module 4: Configuring Application Delivery
• Module 9: Hybrid Deployment w/ Exchange Server
Module 5: Creating the Private Cloud Building Blocks
• Module 10: Exchange Online Archiving and Compliance
Module 6: Deploying and Accessing a Private Cloud
• Module 11: Lync Online Overview and Configuration
Module 7: Monitoring the Private Cloud Infrastructure
• Module 12: SharePoint Online Overview
Module 8: Extending and Customizing Monitoring of the Private Cloud Infrastructure
• Module 13: SharePoint Online Administration
Module 9: Implementing Service Management for the Private Cloud
• Module 14: SharePoint Online Extensibility and Customization
Module 10: Protecting the Private Cloud Infrastructure
• Module 15: Office 365 Deployment Overview
Module 11: Automating and Standardizing the Private Cloud
Module 12: Configuring the Cloud Services Process Pack
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
100
Sharepoint 2010
Private Cloud
Monitoring and Operating a Private Cloud with System Center 2012
Versione:
103
Configuring and Administering Microsoft SharePoint 2010
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for datacenter administrators who are responsible for
monitoring and protecting the private cloud infrastructure It is also intended for solution
architects who are responsible for designing private cloud architectures and extending
existing private cloud solutions The primary audience for this course is administrators
who create service requests
Audience:
This course is intended for IT professionals who are experienced Windows Server 2003
or 2008 administrators and are interested in learning how to administer SharePoint
2010 or SharePoint Online The course is also intended for part-time Business Application
Administrators (BAAs) who are engaged in administering Line of Business (LOB)
applications in conjunction with internal business customers
Prerequisiti:
Because this is an extensive technical domain that includes several individual products
and technologies, it is strongly recommended administrators have prerequisite
knowledge in the following areas:
• Windows Server 2008 R2 experience
• Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) knowledge
• Networking experience
• Working knowledge of previous versions of System Center products
• Knowledge of configuration of Microsoft SharePoint
• Hyper-V knowledge
• Knowledge of data center management processes
• Storage Area Network (SAN) Knowledge
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Administering Active Directory by creating and managing user and group accounts,
delegation of administration, and configuring Group Policy
• Administering network infrastructure—DNS and TCP/IP connectivity
• General conceptual awareness of Microsoft NET Framework as it relates to
SharePoint 2010
• Administering Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or 2008 through creating logons, assigning
roles and using Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio
• One year’s experience using Windows PowerShell cmdlets
• General security and authentication practices
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the private cloud infrastructure
• Configure and optimize business unit clouds
• Deploy cloud services
• Monitor private cloud services
• Configure application performance monitoring
• Operate and extend service management in the private cloud
• Automate incident creation, remediation, and change requests
• Implement problem management in the private cloud
• Automate Self-Service provisioning
• Protect the resources in the private cloud by using Data Protection Manager
• Configure compliance in the private cloud
• Configure SLAs, dashboards, and widgets
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introducing Microsoft SharePoint 2010
• Module 2: Creating a SharePoint 2010 Intranet
• Module 3: Administering and Automating SharePoint
• Module 4: Configuring Content Management
• Module 5: Configuring Authentication
• Module 6: Securing Content
• Module 7: Managing SharePoint Customizations
Durata:
5 days
• Module 8: Configuring and Securing SharePoint Services and Service Applications
Contenuti
Module 1: Introduction to the Private Cloud
• Module 9: User Profiles and Social Networking
Module 2: Configuring and Optimizing Business Unit Clouds
• Module 10: Administering and Configuring SharePoint Search
Module 3: Deploying Cloud Services
• Module 11: Implementing Productivity Service Applications
Module 4: Monitoring Private Cloud Services
• Module 12: Installing and Upgrading to SharePoint 2010
Module 5: Configuring Application Performance Monitoring
• Module 13: Implementing Business Continuity
Module 6: Operating and Extending Service Management in the Private Cloud
• Module 14: Monitoring and Optimizing SharePoint Performance
Module 7: Automatic Incident Creation, Remediation, and Change Requests
• Module 15: SharePoint Online and Office 365
Module 8: Problem Management in the Private Cloud
Module 9: Automating Self-Service Provisioning
Module 10: Private Cloud Protection and Recovery
Module 11: Configuring Compliance in the Private Cloud
Module 12: Configuring SLAs, Dashboards, and Widgets
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
102
Sharepoint 2010
105
Designing a Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Infrastructure
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
• Module 4: Designing a Physical Architecture
This course is intended for IT Professionals who use Microsoft SharePoint 2010 in a
team-based, medium-sized to large environment While they may have implemented
a SharePoint deployment, they have limited experience in designing a SharePoint
infrastructure
• Module 5: Designing a Security Plan
Before attending this course, students must have:
• At least 2 years experience administering, deploying, managing, monitoring,
upgrading, migrating, and designing SharePoint servers
• At least one year’s experience of mapping business requirements to logical and
physical technical design
• Working knowledge of network design, including network security
• Completed course 10174A: TS ITPro: Configuring and Managing Microsoft
SharePoint 2010, or have equivalent knowledge and experience
• Module 8: Planning Social Computing
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the core methods for identifying business requirements and how these
affect planning for a SharePoint 2010 and SharePoint Online deployment
• Describe how to plan the service application architecture in SharePoint 2010 and
SharePoint Online
• Describe the principles of designing to maximize performance and capacity in a
SharePoint 2010 deployment
• Describe how to successfully plan the physical components of a SharePoint 2010
deployment
• Describe the security architecture of SharePoint 2010 and SharePoint Online and
the importance of creating a design that is based on the principle of least privilege
• Explain how to select authentication methods in a SharePoint 2010 and SharePoint
Online design
• Describe how to match the managed metadata architecture in SharePoint 2010 and
SharePoint Online to business requirements
• Describe how to plan a social computing implementation of SharePoint 2010 and
SharePoint Online that meets business requirements
• Describe the architecture and topologies that are available to service a range of
search requirements across business models
• Describe the core functionality of Enterprise Content Management (ECM) in
SharePoint 2010 and how it influences solution design
• Describe core BI principles that will affect planning for SharePoint 2010
• Describe how to plan for data governance in SharePoint 2010 and SharePoint Online
• Describe the considerations for developing a maintenance and monitoring plan for
SharePoint 2010 that also incorporates the technologies that support SharePoint
2010
• Describe how to develop a business continuity plan for SharePoint 2010 and
SharePoint Online
• Module 13: Designing a Maintenance and Monitoring Plan
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Designing a Logical Architecture
• Module 6: Planning Authentication
• Module 7: Planning Managed Metadata
• Module 9: Designing an Enterprise Search Strategy
• Module 10: Planning Enterprise Content Management
• Module 11: Planning a SharePoint 2010 Implementation of a Business Intelligence
Strategy
• Module 12: Developing a Plan for Governance
• Module 14: Planning Business Continuity
• Module 15: Planning for Upgrade to SharePoint 2010
• Module 16: Planning for SharePoint Online
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
104
• Module 2: Planning a Service Application Architecture
• Module 3: Planning for Performance and Capacity
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Sharepoint 2010
107
Designing and Developing Microsoft SharePoint Server 2010
Applications
Versione:
Audience:
• Module 2: Designing for User Experience
This course is intended for IT professionals who will be responsible for designing custom
code for projects that are deployed to SharePoint 2010 servers To be successful in this
course, the student will have at least two years of SharePoint development experience
and should have experience with ASPNET and Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
• Module 3: Designing for Data
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Understanding of the problem-solving techniques that apply to the Software
Development Life Cycle (SDLC), including the versioning of software and the
management of configuration and content in a software system
• Basic knowledge of Web application architecture
• Experience in developing in a team environment
• Working knowledge of ASPNET and Visual Studio
• Experience in SharePoint infrastructure including servers and services
• Experience in SharePoint development including the APIs and XML schemas
necessary to create web parts, perform data access, and provision fields, lists,
content types, etc
• Module 6: Designing Processing Solutions
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Develop strategies for caching, session state, as well as design for high performance
sites by limiting page size and iteration
• Determine the most suitable presentation method, visual elements, programmatic
objects and multilingual strategy which meets the design objectives
• Evaluate available data access and storage methods and determine the appropriate
implementation for the application requirements
• Identify the pros and cons of various data capture options and specify the most
effective method or combination of methods for capturing user input
• Evaluate the use and implementation of SharePoint artifacts and determine which
artifacts best meet the needs of the application requirements
• Design processing systems to get work done in the solution
• Create an effective strategy for implementation and deployment of custom solutions
in both development and production environments
• Create a development strategy to allow multiple developers and administrators to
work together
• Devise a strategy for developing and deploying upgrades over time as the solution
evolves
• Develop an information architecture strategy that will support flexibility and growth
and a navigation strategy that fits on top of this information architecture
• Plan a comprehensive branding strategy and determine the necessary application
elements required to support that strategy
• Design and implement a security approach which supports both code access and
end-user functionality
• Design an effective strategy for optimizing page render times and data access
methods within SharePoint 2010
• Determine the appropriate use of unit and integration tests within SharePoint and
design an effective strategy for ensuring maximum code reliability
• Module 14: Designing a Testing Strategy
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: ASPNET Advanced Concepts for SharePoint
Prerequisiti:
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
• Module 4: Designing Data Capture and Integration
• Module 5: Designing Artifacts
• Module 7: Designing Packaging
• Module 8: Designing a Development Strategy
• Module 9: Developing Version and Deployment
• Module 10: Designing Information Architecture and Navigation
• Module 11: Designing Branding and Customization Support
• Module 12: Designing Security
• Module 13: Designing for Page and Data Access Performance
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
106
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Sharepoint 2010
109
Microsoft SharePoint 2010, Application Development
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
• Module 2: Using SharePoint 2010 Developer Tools
This course is intended for professional developers who use Microsoft SharePoint
2010 in a team-based, medium-sized to large development environment Members of
the audience are experienced users of Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 SP1 The audience
understands how to use the new features of SharePoint 2010 and Visual Studio 2010
• Module 3: Developing SharePoint 2010 Web Parts
Before attending this course, students must have:
• An understanding of the problem-solving techniques that apply to software
development
• Approximately 12 months experience with ASPNET 35 with Visual Studio 2008 (or
later)
• Approximately 1 month development experience with SharePoint 2007 or
SharePoint 2010 and VS2010 (includes beta releases) creating code that interacts
with the SharePoint Server-side APIs
• Experience performing end user tasks with SharePoint 2007 or SharePoint 2010 and
an understanding of the purpose and use of the following:
• Lists
• Documents and Libraries
• Personalizing an SP page/site
• Using MySites
• Using SharePoint Designer
• Module 6: Developing Solutions by Using Business Connectivity Services
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the SharePoint 2010 development platform and the benefits and features
that it offers to developers
• Use development tools that are integrated with the SharePoint 2010 development
platform, such as Visual Studio 2010 and SharePoint Designer 2010
• Develop Web Parts for SharePoint 2010 solutions
• Develop code that uses the server-side objects provided by the SharePoint 2010
development platform
• Develop event receivers and manipulate application settings for SharePoint 2010
solutions
• Develop solutions that access external data by using Business Connectivity Services
• Develop workflows as part of SharePoint 2010 solutions
• Develop code that uses the client-side objects provided by the SharePoint 2010
development platform
• Develop server ribbon controls and client dialogs for the new user interface
platform of SharePoint 2010
• Develop Microsoft Silverlight applications that are integrated with SharePoint 2010
data and solutions
• Develop sandboxed solutions for SharePoint 2010
• Develop code that uses the taxonomic and user profile services of the SharePoint
2010 development platform
• Develop code that uses the content management services of the SharePoint 2010
development platform
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to the SharePoint 2010 Development Platform
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
• Module 4: Working with SharePoint Objects on the Server
• Module 5: Creating Event Receivers and Application Settings
• Module 7: Developing SharePoint 2010 Workflows
• Module 8: Working with Client-Based APIs for SharePoint 2010
• Module 9: Developing Interactive User Interfaces
• Module 10: Developing Silverlight Applications for SharePoint
• Module 11: Developing Sandboxed Solutions
• Module 12: Working with SharePoint Server Profiles and Taxonomy APIs
• Module 13: Developing Content Management Solutions
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
108
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Sharepoint 2010
SQL Server 2008
Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Search for Application Developers
Versione:
111
Basics of Transact SQL with SQL Server 2008 R2
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for application developers and advanced system administrators
working in the Enterprise Search area to extend SharePoint Server 2010
Audience:
This course is intended for Power Users and IT Professionals that are called on to work
with SQL Server in the retrieving, or modifying of data and need a good foundation to
perform those functions This would include those users that develop reports and need
to create Data Sets that work efficiently
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• At least two years of experience as a developer for Microsoft Office SharePoint
Server 2007 and/or SharePoint Server 2010
• Understanding of Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and supporting technologies,
such as Internet Information Services
• Experience deploying and configuring Windows Server 2008 and Microsoft SQL
Server Technologies
• Familiarity with creating projects in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
• Familiarity with Microsoft NET programming in Visual Studio 2010
• Familiarity with Microsoft Windows PowerShell 20
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students should have:
• A working knowledge of databases but not necessarily Microsoft SQL
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Use SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS)
• Use SSMS to generate efficient queries
• Use the Object Browser in SSMS to locate objects and view their dependencies so
you know the potential effect of a change
• Use the Template manager in SSMS to quickly import correctly formatted code that
was prewritten by the SQL community
• Customize the SSMS environment to match the users individual needs
• Run a trace in SQL Profiler to analyze performance of operations
• Use the debugger with a query to troubleshoot it
• Work with SQL Server Integration Services to do a basic package for import/export,
how to save it and automatically execute it
• Use the Database Tuning Advisor for faster queries
• Read an SSMS Execution Plan and understand it and learn why you need to
understand it
• Explain and perform single table queries and the proper method to develop them
• Perform various joins between tables to reunite data stored separately such as an
order and its details, or a salesperson and their sales and the product in the sale
• Understand indexing and its impact on speed of retrieval of data and when to not
use it
• Write code within the context of a transaction to prevent data corruption
• Utilize Try-Catch error handling and learn why to use it
• Use Stored Procedures to access data and understand the improved security of
using them and how easy they are to create via the community templates in SSMS
• Explain the new language features and how they improve the data environment and
reporting
• Write a sub-query as an advanced technique
• Use common table expressions in a query
• Work with the XML datatype and the new methods especially for XML
• Module 8: Extending Connectors
Durata:
3 days
• Module 9: Creating Custom Connectors
Contenuti
• Module 1: The Toolsets
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Explain the SharePoint search architecture and identify search components
• Crawl and configure SharePoint sites and file shares
• Create and configure a search site with out of the box search web parts
• Create and configure federated locations and federated web parts
• Implement SharePoint search scopes and managed metadata
• Configure and customize SharePoint linguistic features
• Create a search web part using the Federated Object Model
• Create a Query Web Services client to submit a query and retrieve results
• Create an External Content Type using SharePoint Designer
• Create a NET Assembly Connector using Visual Studio 2010
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Processing Data Sources
• Module 2: Configuring Search Sites
• Module 3: Configuring Federation
• Module 4: Scopes and Managed Metadata
• Module 5: SharePoint Linguistics
• Module 6: Federated Object Model
• Module 7: Creating Custom Search Applications
• Module 2: Data Types and New T-SQL Language Features
• Module 3: Single Table Queries
• Module 4: Joining Multiple Tables
• Module 5: Subqueries, Common Table Expressions and Ranking Functions
• Module 6: Indexing
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
110
SQL Server 2008
112
113
Dashboards for Monitoring, Analyzing and Managing
Versione:
• Module 8: Data Modification, Transactions and Error Processing
Audience:
The goal of creating effective dashboards is a collaborative team effort This course is
targeted at that team
The Project Manager to gain an understanding of best practices, follow a design
methodology and gain an understanding of ineffective dashboard designs
The Business Managers so they can understand the input that they will need to provide
to the project team and what they should expect back from these dashboards
IT as they manage the infrastructure
Report Builders’ so their designs can be effectively presented to the report consumer
Business Intelligence/SQL Personnel as it is their data that is displayed and analyzed
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students should have:
• An understanding of the state of the data repository in their environment
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Utilize the dashboard development methodology
• Optimize visual design of dashboards
• Structure dashboards hierarchies
• Understand the basics of data visualizations
• List the thirteen crucial errors in dashboard design
• Implement user menus in scorecards
• Understand how to connect into multiple data sources
• Gain familiarity with the definitions of common Business Intelligence terms
• Learn the methodology for connecting into and displaying near-real-time data
• Create parameterized reports
• Create sub reports
• Create map based reports
• Use the Decomposition Tree in PerformancePoint Services
• Connect together SharePoint components into PerformancePoint components
• Use report parts as a library
• Know when to use Report Builder, Dashboard Designer and SharePoint Designer
• Module 9: Stored Procedures and Triggers
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
• Module 10: XML
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Use and understand Report Builder 30
Use and understand Dashboard Designer from PerformancePoint Services
Use and understand SharePoint Designer for working with dashboards
Utilize Excel Services to share Excel workbooks
Design and implement KPIs
Understand the scoring methodologies used with indicators to change visual
displays
Be able to develop proper filters for easy end-user click to detail on dashboards
Group scorecards into dashboards and link them together
Modify the web page hosting the dashboards for branding
Implement master pages in dashboards for consistency with company standards
Develop multiple-valued KPIs For example this year actual and target and last year
actual and target at the same relative point in time
Implement time intelligence features to query such as Year-To-Date, Last 6 Months
etc
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
• Module 7: Query Tuning
115
Designing and Optimizing Database Solutions with Microsoft SQL
Server 2008
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Develop filters for scorecards
Understand the implications of where a filter is applied
Create effective graphs
Create visual reports
Create effective gauges
Utilize sparklines in reports
Understand how to secure dashboards
Use dynamic hierarchies in dashboards
Implement user menus in dashboards
Create monitoring dashboards
Create analytical dashboards
Create management dashboards
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Course overview
Versione:
Audience:
The audience of this course is developers who implement database solutions or perform
development utilizing the programming features and functionality of SQL Server
Students taking this course are expected to have three or more years of experience
working on databases for two or more of the following phases in the product lifecycle design, development, deployment, optimization, maintenance, or support
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students should have:
• Knowledge of using a data modeling tool
• Knowledge of SQL Server 2005 features, tools, and technologies
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Design a database design strategy
• Design a database for optimal performance
• Design security for a database
• Design programming objects
• Design queries for performance
• Design a transaction and concurrency strategy
• Design an XML strategy
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Designing a Conceptual Database Model
• Module 2: The Microsoft Business Intelligence Stack tools
• Module 3: Dashboard design principles
• Module 4: Report Builder 30
• Module 5: Dashboard Designer
• Module 6: SharePoint Designer
• Module 7: Dashboards that monitor
• Module 8: Dashboards that analyze
• Module 9: Dashboards for management strategy
• Module 10: Custom reports and graphs using MDX (Optional module)
• Module 2: Designing a Logical Database Model
• Module 3: Designing a Physical Database Model
• Module 4: Designing Databases for Optimal Performance
• Module 5: Designing Security for SQL Server 2008
• Module 6: Designing a Strategy for Database Access
• Module 7: Designing Queries for Optimal Performance
• Module 8: Designing a Transaction and Concurrency Strategy
• Module 9: Designing an XML Strategy
• Module 10: Designing SQL Server 2008 Components
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
SQL Server 2008
114
SQL Server 2008
Implementing a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Database
117
• Module 7: Reading SQL Server Execution Plans
• Module 8: Improving Performance through Nonclustered Indexes
• Module 9: Designing and Implementing Stored Procedures
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
This course is intended for IT Professionals who want to become skilled on SQL
Server 2008 R2 product features and technologies for implementing a database To
be successful in this course, the student should have knowledge of basic relational
database concepts and writing T-SQL queries
• Module 10: Merging Data and Passing Tables
Before attending this course, students should have:
• Working knowledge of Transact-SQL (ability to write Transact-SQL queries) or Course
2778A: Writing Queries Using Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Transact-SQL
• Working knowledge of relational databases (database design skills)
• Core Windows Server skills
• Basic programming language
• Module 13: Designing and Implementing User-Defined Functions
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Understand the product, its components, and basic configuration
• Work with the data types supported by SQL Server
• Design and implement tables and work with schemas
• Design and implement views and partitioned views
• Describe the concept of an index and determine the appropriate data type for
indexes and composite index structures
• Identify the appropriate table structures and implement clustered indexes and
heaps
• Describe and capture execution plans
• Design and implement non-clustered indexes, covering indexes, and included
columns
• Design and implement stored procedures
• Implement table types, table valued parameters, and the MERGE statement
• Describe transactions, transaction isolation levels, and application design patterns
for highly-concurrent applications
• Design and implement T-SQL error handling and structured exception handling
• Design and implement scalar and table-valued functions
• Design and implement constraints
• Design and implement triggers
• Describe and implement target use cases of SQL CLR integration
• Describe and implement XML data and schema in SQL Server
• Use FOR XML and XPath queries
• Describe and use spatial data types in SQL Server
• Implement and query full-text indexes
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to SQL Server and its Toolset
• Module 11: Creating Highly Concurrent SQL Server Applications
• Module 12: Handling Errors in T-SQL Code
• Module 14: Ensuring Data Integrity through Constraints
• Module 15: Responding to Data Manipulation via Triggers
• Module 16: Implementing Managed Code in SQL Server
• Module 17: Storing XML Data in SQL Server
• Module 18: Querying XML Data in SQL Server
• Module 19: Working with SQL Server Spatial Data
• Module 20: Working with Full-Text Indexes and Queries
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
116
• Module 2: Working with Data Types
• Module 3: Designing and Implementing Tables
• Module 4: Designing and Implementing Views
• Module 5: Planning for SQL Server Indexing
• Module 6: Implementing Table Structures in SQL Server
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2008
SQL Server 2008
Implementing and Maintaining Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Analysis
Services
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
119
Implementing and Maintaining Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Integration Services
Versione:
The primary audience for this course is individuals who design and maintain business
intelligence solutions for their organization These individuals work in environments
where databases play a key role in their primary job and may perform database
administration and maintenance as part of their primary job responsibilities
Before attending this course, students should have:
• Conceptual understanding of OLAP solutions
• Experience navigating the Microsoft Windows Server environment
• Experience with Windows services (starting and stopping)
• Experience creating service accounts and permissions
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server, including:
• SQL Server Agent
• SQL Server query language (SELECT, UPDATE, INSERT, and DELETE)
• SQL Server System tables
• SQL Server accounts (users and permissions)
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe how SQL Server Analysis Services can be used to implement analytical
solutions
• Create multidimensional analysis solutions with SQL Server Analysis Services
• Implement dimensions and cubes in an Analysis Services solution
• Implement measures and measure groups in an Analysis Services solution
• Query a multidimensional Analysis Services solution
• Customize an Analysis Services cube
• Deploy and secure an Analysis Services database
• Maintain a multidimensional Analysis Services solution
• Implement a Data Mining solution
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to Microsoft SQL Server Analysis Services
• Module 2: Creating Multidimensional Analysis Solutions
• Module 3: Working with Cubes and Dimensions
• Module 4: Working with Measures and Measure Groups
• Module 5: Querying Multidimensional Analysis Solutions
• Module 6: Customizing Cube Functionality
• Module 7: Deploying and Securing an Analysis Services Database
Audience:
This course is intended for information technology (IT) professionals and developers
who need to implement data transfer or extract, transform, and load (ETL) solutions by
using Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Integration Services
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students should have:
• Exposure to enterprise data import and export scenarios
• Experience navigating the Microsoft Windows Server environment
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server, including:
• SQL Server Agent
• SQL Server query language (SELECT, UPDATE, INSERT, and DELETE)
• SQL Server System tables
• SQL Server accounts (users and permissions)
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe SQL Server Integration Services and its tools
• Create an Integration Services package
• Implement control flow in an Integration Services package
• Implement data flow in an Integration Services package
• Implement logging in an Integration Services package
• Debug and implement error handling in an Integration Services package
• Implement checkpoints and transactions in an Integration Services package
• Deploy an Integration Services package
• Manage and secure an Integration Services package
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to SQL Server 2008 Integration Services
• Module 2: Developing Integration Services Solutions
• Module 3: Implementing Control Flow
• Module 4: Implementing Data Flow
• Module 5: Implementing Logging
• Module 6: Debugging and Error Handling
• Module 7: Implementing Checkpoints and Transactions
• Module 8: Configuring and Deploying Packages
• Module 9: Managing and Securing Packages
• Module 8: Maintaining a Multidimensional Solution
• Module 9: Introduction to Data Mining
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
118
SQL Server 2008
SQL Server 2008
Implementing and Maintaining Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Reporting
Services
Versione:
121
Maintaining a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Database
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for information technology (IT) professionals and developers
who need to implement reporting solutions by using Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Reporting Services
Audience:
The primary audience for this course is individuals who administer and maintain
SQL Server databases This course can also be helpful for individuals who develop
applications that deliver content from SQL Server databases
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students should have:
• Exposure to creating reports in Microsoft Access or other third-party reporting
products, such as Crystal Reports
• Conceptual understanding of the push and pull distribution/subscription paradigm
• Experience navigating the Microsoft Windows Server environment
• Experience with Windows services (starting and stopping)
• Experience creating service accounts and permissions
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server
• SQL Server Agent
• SQL Server query language (SELECT, UPDATE, INSERT, and DELETE)
• SQL Server System tables
• SQL Server accounts (users and permissions)
Prerequisiti:
• Basic knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system and its core
functionality
• Working knowledge of Transact-SQL
• Working knowledge of relational databases
• Some experience with database design
• Completed Course 2778: Writing Queries Using Microsoft SQL Server 2008 TransactSQL
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Explain SQL Server 2008 R2 architecture, resources requirements and perform prechecks of I/O subsystems
• Plan, install and configure SQL Server 2008 R2
• Backup and restore databases
• Import and export wizards and explain how they relate to SSIS
• Use BCP and BULK INSERT to import data
• Manage security
• Assign, configure fixed database roles and create and assign user defined database
roles
• Configure and assign permissions
• Implement SQL Server 2008 R2 Audits
• Manage SQL Server 2008 R2 Agent and Jobs
• Configure database mails, alerts and notifications
• Maintain databases
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe SQL Server Reporting Services and its components
• Create a Reporting Services report
• Enhance a Reporting Services report
• Create and manipulate data sets
• Use report models to implement reporting for business users
• Configure report publishing and execution settings
• Implement subscriptions for reports
• Administer Reporting Services
• Implement custom Reporting Services applications
Durata:
3 days
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to SQL Server 2008 R2 and its Toolset
• Module 2: Authoring Basic Reports
• Module 2: Preparing Systems for SQL Server 2008 R2
• Module 3: Enhancing Basic Reports
• Module 3: Installing and Configuring SQL Server 2008 R2
• Module 4: Manipulating Data Sets
• Module 4: Working with Databases
• Module 5: Using Report Models
• Module 5: Understanding SQL Server 2008 R2 Recovery Models
• Module 6: Publishing and Executing Reports
• Module 6: Backup of SQL Server 2008 R2 Databases
• Module 7: Using Subscriptions to Distribute Reports
• Module 7: Restoring SQL Server 2008 R2 Databases
• Module 8: Administering Reporting Services
• Module 8: Importing and Exporting Data
• Module 9: Programming Reporting Services
• Module 9: Authenticating and Authorizing Users
• Module 10: Assigning Server and Database Roles
• Module 11: Authorizing Users to Access Resources
• Module 12: Auditing SQL Server Environments
• Module 13: Automating SQL Server 2008 R2 Management
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
120
SQL Server 2008
122
123
Writing Queries Using Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Transact-SQL
Versione:
• Module 15: Monitoring SQL Server 2008 R2 with Alerts and Notifications
Audience:
This course is intended for SQL Server database administrators, implementers, system
engineers, and developers who are responsible for writing queries
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Knowledge of data integrity concepts
• Core Windows Server skills
• Relational database design skills
• Programming skills
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the uses of and ways to execute the Transact-SQL language
• Use querying tool
• Write SELECT queries to retrieve data
• Group and summarize data by using Transact-SQL
• Join data from multiple tables
• Write queries that retrieve and modify data by using subqueries
• Modify data in tables
• Query text fields with full-text search
• Describe how to create programming objects
• Use various techniques when working with complex queries
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Getting Started with Databases and Transact-SQL in SQL Server 2008
• Module 16: Performing Ongoing Database Maintenance
• Module 17: Tracing Access to SQL Server 2008 R2
• Module 18: Monitoring SQL Server 2008 R2
• Module 19: Managing Multiple Servers
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
• Module 20: Troubleshooting Common SQL Server 2008 R2 Administrative Issues
• Module 2: Querying and Filtering Data
• Module 3: Grouping and Summarizing Data
• Module 4: Joining Data from Multiple Tables
• Module 5: Working with Subqueries
• Module 6: Modifying Data in Tables
• Module 7: Querying Metadata, XML, and Full-Text Indexes
• Module 8: Using Programming Objects for Data Retrieval
• Module 9: Using Advanced Querying Techniques
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
• Module 14: Configuring Security for SQL Server Agent
SQL Server 2012
125
Administering Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Databases
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
• Module 8: Importing and Exporting Data
The primary audience for this course is individuals who administer and maintain SQL
Server databases These individuals perform database administration and maintenance
as their primary area of responsibility, or work in environments where databases play a
key role in their primary job
• Module 9: Authenticating and Authorizing Users
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• Basic knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system and its core
functionality
• Working knowledge of Transact-SQL
• Working knowledge of relational databases
• Some experience with database design
• Module 12: Auditing SQL Server Environments
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan and install SQL Server
• Describes the system databases, the physical structure of databases and the most
common configuration options related to them
• Explain the concept of the transaction log and SQL Server recovery models and
implement different backup strategies available with SQL Server
• Create SQL Server Backups
• Restore SQL Server databases
• Use the import/export wizards and explain how they relate to SSIS
• Work with SQL Server security models, logins and users
• Work with fixed server roles, user-defined server roles, fixed database roles and
user-defined database roles
• Work with permissions and the assignment of permissions
• Work with SQL Server Audit
• Work with SQL Server Agent, jobs and job history
• Implement SQL Server agent security, proxy accounts and credentials
• Configure database mail, alerts and notifications
• Create database maintenance plans
• Work with SQL Profiler and SQL Trace stored procedures
• Introduce DMVs and the configuration of data collection
• Work with Central Management Servers and Multi-Server queries, Virtualization of
SQL Server and Data-Tier Applications
• Troubleshoot SQL Server databases
• Module 17: Tracing Access to SQL Server 2012
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to SQL Server 2012 and its Toolset
• Module 10: Assigning Server and Database Roles
• Module 11: Authorizing Users to Access Resources
• Module 13: Automating SQL Server 2012 Management
• Module 14: Configuring Security for SQL Server Agent
• Module 15: Monitoring SQL Server 2012 with Alerts and Notifications
• Module 16: Performing Ongoing Database Maintenance
• Module 18: Monitoring SQL Server 2012
• Module 19: Managing Multiple Servers
• Module 20: Troubleshooting Common SQL Server 2012 Administrative Issues
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
124
• Module 2: Preparing Systems for SQL Server 2012
• Module 3: Installing and Configuring SQL Server 2012
• Module 4: Working with Databases
• Module 5: Understanding SQL Server 2012 Recovery Models
• Module 6: Backup of SQL Server 2012 Databases
• Module 7: Restoring SQL Server 2012 Databases
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2012
127
Designing Business Intelligence Solutions with Microsoft SQL Server
2012
Versione:
• Module 10: Monitoring and Optimizing a BI Solution
Audience:
This course is intended for BI professionals such as BI Architects or database
professionals who need to design BI solutions BI Architects are responsible for the
overall design of the BI infrastructure, including how it relates to other data systems in
use In addition, their responsibilities include Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) cube
design and integration with Microsoft SharePoint or line-of-business applications Finally,
they may apply those skills in a Windows Azure SQL Server database environment
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• A basic understanding of dimensional modeling (star schema) for data warehouses
• The ability to create Integration Services packages that include control flows and
data flows
• The ability to create a basic multidimensional cube with Analysis Services
• The ability to create a basic tabular model with PowerPivot and Analysis Services
• The ability to create Reporting Services reports with Report Designer
• The ability to implement authentication and permissions in the SQL Server database
engine, Analysis Services, and Reporting Services
• Familiarity with SharePoint Server and Microsoft Office applications, particularly
Excel
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan the components of a BI solution
• Plan a BI infrastructure
• Design a data warehouse
• Design an ETL solution
• Plan analytical data models
• Plan a BI delivery solution
• Design a Reporting Services solution
• Design an Excel reporting solution
• Plan a SharePoint Server BI solution
• Monitor and optimize a BI solution
• Plan for BI operations
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Planning a BI Solution
• Module 11: Planning BI Operations
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
126
• Module 2: Planning a BI Infrastructure
• Module 3: Designing a Data Warehouse
• Module 4: Designing an ETL Solution
• Module 5: Designing Analytical Data Models
• Module 6: Planning a BI Delivery Solution
• Module 7: Designing a Reporting Services Solution
• Module 8: Designing an Excel-Based Reporting Solution
• Module 9: Planning a SharePoint Server BI Solution
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2012
129
Designing Database Solutions for Microsoft SQL Server 2012
Versione:
Audience:
• Module 10: Automating Multi-Server Maintenance
This course is intended for individuals who design database solutions for organizations
and have experience with database development and administering SQL Server
databases These individuals design databases as their primary area of responsibility
They are responsible to plan and design database structure, storage, objects, and
servers They also create the plan for the environment in which the database solution
runs
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• Experience with Transact-SQL
• Familiarity with SQL Server 2012 components and tools
• Familiarity with objects in a SQL Server database
• Familiarity with enterprise Windows network and security architecture
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Design an appropriate database server infrastructure for a given business
application scenario
• Design a logical schema for a database based on application requirements
• Design the physical implementation of a database for a given set of requirements
• Evaluate options for including binary large object data in a database design
• Plan and manage indexes to optimize performance
• Describe the key considerations for designing security for SQL Server instances and
databases
• Plan policy-based management to manage server instances, databases, and other
SQL Server 2012 objects more efficiently
• Plan SQL Server health monitoring
• Implement SQL Server health monitoring by using SQL Server Utility
• Identify and implement the appropriate backup strategy for a given scenario
• Plan and manage multi-server maintenance and automation
• Understand the benefits of using PowerShell to manage SQL Server 2012
• Design an optimal replication strategy from a given set of business and technical
requirements
• Plan and implement a high availability solution
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Designing a Database Server Infrastructure
• Module 11: Managing SQL Server with PowerShell
• Module 12: Replicating Data
• Module 13: Designing for High Availability
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
128
• Module 2: Designing a Logical Database Schema
• Module 3: Designing a Physical Database Implementation
• Module 4: Designing a Database Solution for BLOB Data
• Module 5: Tuning Database Performance
• Module 6: Designing Database Security
• Module 7: Using Policy-Based Management
• Module 8: Monitoring Server Health
• Module 9: Designing a Database Backup Solution
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2012
131
Developing Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Databases
Versione:
• Module 6: Implementing Table Structures in SQL Server 2012
Audience:
The primary audience for this course is IT Professionals who want to become skilled on
SQL Server 2012 product features and technologies for implementing a database
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• Knowledge of writing T-SQL queries
• Knowledge of basic relational database concepts
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Introduce the entire SQL Server platform and its major tools It will cover editions,
versions, basics of network listeners, and concepts of services and service accounts
• Determine appropriate data types to be used when designing tables, convert data
between data types, and create alias data types
• Be aware of good design practices regarding SQL Server tables and be able to create
tables using T-SQL (Note: partitioned tables are not covered)
• Implement PRIMARY KEY, FOREIGN KEY, DEFAULT, CHECK and UNIQUE constraints,
and investigate cascading FOREIGN KEY constraints
• Determine appropriate single column and composite indexes strategies
• Create tables as heaps and tables with clustered indexes Also consider the design of
a table and suggest an appropriate structure
• Read and interpret details of common elements from execution plans
• Design effective non-clustered indexes
• Design and implement views
• Design and implement stored procedures
• Work with table types, table valued parameters and use the MERGE statement to
create stored procedures that update data warehouses
• Design and implement functions, both scalar and table-valued (Also describe where
they can lead to performance issues)
• Perform basic investigation of a deadlock situation and learn how transaction
isolation levels affect application concurrency
• Use both traditional T-SQL error handling code and structured exception handling
• Design and implement DML triggers
• Learn appropriate uses for SQL CLR integration and implement an existing NET
assembly within SQL Server
• Store XML data and schemas in SQL Server
• Perform basic queries on XML data in SQL Server
• Work with the GEOGRAPHY and GEOMETRY data types
• Implement and query a full-text index
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to SQL Server 2012 and its Toolset
• Module 7: Reading SQL Server 2012 Execution Plans
• Module 8: Improving Performance through Nonclustered Indexes
• Module 9: Designing and Implementing Views
• Module 10: Designing and Implementing Stored Procedures
• Module 11: Merging Data and Passing Tables
• Module 12: Designing and Implementing User-Defined Functions
• Module 13: Creating Highly Concurrent SQL Server 2012 Applications
• Module 14: Handling Errors in T-SQL Code
• Module 15: Responding to Data Manipulation via Triggers
• Module 16: Implementing Managed Code in SQL Server 2012
• Module 17: Storing XML Data in SQL Server 2012
• Module 18: Querying XML Data in SQL Server
• Module 19: Working with SQL Server 2012 Spatial Data
• Module 20: Working with Full-Text Indexes and Queries
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
130
• Module 2: Working with Data Types
• Module 3: Designing and Implementing Tables
• Module 4: Ensuring Data Integrity through Constraints
• Module 5: Planning for SQL Server 2012 Indexing
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2012
133
Implementing a Data Warehouse with Microsoft SQL Server 2012
Versione:
Audience:
• Module 9: Enforcing Data Quality
This course is intended for database professionals who need to fulfil a Business
Intelligence Developer role They will need to focus on hands-on work creating BI
solutions including Data Warehouse implementation, ETL, and data cleansing Primary
responsibilities include:
• Implementing a data warehouse
• Developing SQL Server Integration Services (SSIS) packages for data extraction,
transformation, and loading (ETL)
• Enforcing data integrity by using Master Data Services
• Cleansing data by using Data Quality Services
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, student should have:
• At least 2 years’ experience of working with relational databases
• Designing a normalized database
• Creating tables and relationships
• Querying with Transact-SQL
• Some exposure to basic programming constructs (such as looping and branching)
• An awareness of key business priorities such as revenue, profitability, and financial
accounting is desirable
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe data warehouse concepts and architecture considerations
• Select an appropriate hardware platform for a data warehouse
• Design and implement a data warehouse
• Implement Data Flow in an SSIS Package
• Implement Control Flow in an SSIS Package
• Debug and Troubleshoot SSIS packages
• Implement an SSIS solution that supports incremental data warehouse loads and
changing data
• Integrate cloud data into a data warehouse ecosystem infrastructure
• Implement data cleansing by using Microsoft Data Quality Services
• Implement Master Data Services to enforce data integrity
• Extend SSIS with custom scripts and components
• Deploy and Configure SSIS packages
• Describe how information workers can consume data from the data warehouse
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to Data Warehousing
• Module 10: Using Master Data Services
• Module 11: Extending SQL Server Integration Services
• Module 12: Deploying and Configuring SSIS Packages
• Module 13: Consuming Data in a Data Warehouse
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
132
• Module 2: Data Warehouse Hardware
• Module 3: Designing and Implementing a Data Warehouse
• Module 4: Creating an ETL Solution with SSIS
• Module 5: Implementing Control Flow in an SSIS Package
• Module 6: Debugging and Troubleshooting SSIS Packages
• Module 7: Implementing an Incremental ETL Process
• Module 8: Incorporating Data from the Cloud into a Data Warehouse
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2012
135
Implementing Data Models and Reports with Microsoft SQL Server
2012
Versione:
Audience:
• Module 10: Implementing a Tabular Data Model with Microsoft PowerPivot
This course is intended for individuals who design database solutions for organizations
and have experience with database development and administering SQL Server
databases These individuals design databases as their primary area of responsibility
They are responsible to plan and design database structure, storage, objects, and
servers They also create the plan for the environment in which the database solution
runs.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, student should have:
• At least 2 years’ experience of working with relational databases
• Designing a normalized database
• Creating tables and relationships
• Querying with Transact-SQL
• Some basic knowledge of data warehouse schema topology (including star and
snowflake schemas)
• Some exposure to basic programming constructs (such as looping and branching)
• An awareness of key business priorities such as revenue, profitability, and financial
accounting is desirable
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the components, architecture, and nature of a BI solution
• Create reports with Reporting Services
• Create reusable report items that simplify self-service reporting
• Manage report execution and delivery
• Create a multidimensional database with Analysis Services
• Implement dimensions in a cube
• Implement measures and measure groups in a cube
• Use MDX Syntax
• Customize a cube
• Implement a Tabular Data Model in PowerPivot
• Use DAX to query a tabular model
• Implement a Tabular Database
• Use PowerView to create interactive data visualizations
• Use Data Mining for Predictive Analysis
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to Business Intelligence and Data Modeling
• Module 11: Introduction to DAX
• Module 12: Implementing an Analysis Services Tabular Data Model
• Module 13: Creating Data Visualizations with Power View
• Module 14: Performing Predictive Analysis with Data Mining
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
134
• Module 2: Implementing Reports with SQL Server Reporting Services
• Module 3: Supporting Self Service Reporting
• Module 4: Managing Report Execution and Delivery
• Module 5: Creating Multidimensional Databases
• Module 6: Working with Dimensions
• Module 7: Working with Measures and Measure Groups
• Module 8: Introduction to MDX
• Module 9: Customizing Cube Functionality
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
SQL Server 2012
137
Querying Microsoft SQL Server 2012
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
• Module 15: Querying SQL Server Metadata
This course is intended for Database Administrators, Database Developers, and Business
Intelligence professionals. The course will very likely be well attended by SQL power
users who aren’t necessarily database-focused or plan on taking the exam; namely,
report writers, business analysts and client application developers.
• Module 16: Executing Stored Procedures
Before attending this course, student should have:
• Working knowledge of relational databases
• Basic knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system and its core
functionality
• Module 19: Implementing Transactions
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Write SELECT queries
• Query multiple tables
• Use built-in functions
• Use subqueries
• Execute stored procedures
• Use set operators
• Implement error handling
• Implement transactions
• Use table expressions
• Sort and filter data
• Use window ranking, offset and aggregate functions
• Query SQL Server metadata
• Program with T-SQL
• Improve query performance
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Introduction to Microsoft SQL Server 2012
• Module 17: Programming with T-SQL
• Module 18: Implementing Error Handling
• Module 20: Improving Query Performance
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
136
• Module 2: Getting Started with SQL Azure
• Module 3: Introduction to T-SQL Querying
• Module 4: Writing SELECT Queries
• Module 5: Querying Multiple Tables
• Module 6: Sorting and Filtering Data
• Module 7: Working with SQL Server 2012 Data Types
• Module 8: Using Built-In Functions
• Module 9: Grouping and Aggregating Data
• Module 10: Using Subqueries
• Module 11: Using Table Expressions
• Module 12: Using Set Operators
• Module 13: Using Window Ranking, Offset and Aggregate Functions
• Module 14: Pivoting and Grouping Sets
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
System Center Manager
139
Administering System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
Versione:
Audience:
• Module 8: Managing Application Deployment
This course is intended for Configuration Manager administrators who are responsible
for configuring and managing one or more System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
sites and all supporting systems. They have one to three years of experience supporting
multiple desktop and server computers running the Windows Server operating system
in medium to large enterprise organizations. Administrators may have previous
Configuration Manager experience, or be new to the product.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have system administrator–level working
knowledge of:
• Networking fundamentals, including TCP/IP and Domain Name System (DNS)
• Active Directory principles and management
• Windows Server management including Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server
2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows client fundamentals
• Deployment, configuration, and troubleshooting for Windows-based personal
computers
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 including Reporting Services
• Basic Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) concepts
• Desired: Have a base-level understanding of System Center Configuration Manager
2007
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the System Center 2012 Configuration Manager feature set
• Discover and organize resources
• Manage the Configuration Manager client
• Manage inventory and software metering
• Query and report data
• Manage software deployments by using packages and programs
• Create and deploy applications
• Manage application deployment
• Deploy and manage software updates
• Implement System Center 2012 Endpoint Protection
• Deploy operating systems by using System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
• Manage compliance settings on devices
• Manage mobile devices
• Configure Wake On LAN, power management, and Remote Control
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Overview of System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
• Module 9: Deploying and Managing Software Updates
• Module 10: Implementing Endpoint Protection in Configuration Manager 2012
• Module 11: Managing Operating System Deployment
• Module 12: Managing Compliance Settings
• Module 13: Managing Mobile Devices
• Module 14: Configuring Wake On LAN, Power Management, and Remote Control
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
138
• Module 2: Discovering and Organizing Resources
• Module 3: Managing the Configuration Manager Client
• Module 4: Managing Inventory and Software Metering
• Module 5: Querying and Reporting Data
• Module 6: Managing Software Deployments by Using Packages and Programs
• Module 7: Creating and Deploying Applications
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
System Center Manager
141
Deploying System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
Versione:
Audience:
Contenuti
This course is intended for:
Systems Engineers who need to plan a Microsoft System Center 2012 Configuration
Manager deployment. They have three to five years of experience in medium to large
enterprise organizations supporting multiple desktop and server computers that run
Microsoft Windows.
Configuration Manager Administrators responsible for designing and deploying one
or more System Center 2012 Configuration Manager sites and all supporting systems.
They have three to five years of experience in medium to large enterprise organizations
supporting multiple desktop and server computers that run Microsoft Windows Server.
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• System administrator-level working knowledge of
• Networking fundamentals, including TCP/IP and Domain Name System (DNS)
• Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) principles and management
• Windows Server management including Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server
2008 R2
• Windows Client fundamentals
• Deployment, configuration, and troubleshooting for Windows-based personal
computers
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 including reporting services
• Basic Public Key Infrastructure concepts
• Configuration Manager features and administrative tasks including:
• Working with the Administrator console
• Installing clients
• Hardware and software inventory
• Working with collections
• Reporting
• Deploying applications
• Managing software updates
• Deploying operating systems
• Settings management
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the Configuration Manager 2012 infrastructure and describe typical
deployment scenarios
• Plan and deploy a single primary site
• Plan and configure administrative roles
• Plan and deploy a multiple-site hierarchy including the central administration site,
primary sites, and secondary sites
• Describe replication and data types, and monitor the replication of data throughout
the hierarchy
• Use various methods to plan and deploy Configuration Manager 2012 clients
• Perform maintenance tasks and monitor site systems
• Perform migration of objects from Configuration Manager 2007 to Configuration
Manager 2012
Durata:
3 days
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
• Module 1: Overview of System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
• Module 2: Planning and Deploying a Stand-Alone Primary Site
• Module 3: Planning and Configuring Role-Based Administration
• Module 4: Planning and Deploying a Multiple-Site Hierarchy
• Module 5: Data Replication and Content Management
• Module 6: Planning and Completing System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
Client Deployment
• Module 7: Maintaining and Monitoring System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
• Module 8: Migrating from System Center Configuration Manager 2007 to System
Center 2012 Configuration Manager
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
140
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
System Center Manager
143
Planning, Deploying and Managing Microsoft System Center
Configuration Manager 2007
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
This course is intended for systems engineers with one to three years of experience
supporting multiple desktop and server computers running Microsoft Windows Server
in medium to large enterprise organizations, and who have a need to plan a System
Center Configuration Manager 2007 deployment.
Before attending this course, students must have:
• A base-level understanding of Systems Management Server 2003 or Configurations
Manager 2007
• A system administrator–level working knowledge of:
• Deployment, configuration, and troubleshooting for Windows-based personal
computers
• TCP/IP networking
• SQL Server
• Active Directory
• Basic Public Key Infrastructure concepts
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan, deploy, and manage Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 for
the enterprise environment
• Plan and deploy a single-site architecture
• Plan for and complete client deployment
• Use inventory collection, software metering, and Asset Intelligence
• Query and report data
• Distribute software using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007
• Deploy virtual applications using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager
2007
• Deploy and manage software updates
• Deploy operating systems using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager
2007
• Work with desired configuration management
• Configure Wake On LAN, power management, and remote tools
• Plan and configure a multiple site hierarchy
• Maintain and monitor Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007
• Use Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 native mode and
Internet-Based Client Management
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007
Module 7: Deploying Virtual Applications Using Microsoft System Center Configuration
Manager 2007
Module 8: Deploying and Managing Software Updates
Module 9: Deploying Operating Systems Using Microsoft System Center Configuration
Manager 2007
Module 10: Working with Desired Configuration Management
Module 11: Configuring Wake On LAN, Power Management, and Remote Tools
Module 12: Planning and Configuring a Multiple Site Hierarchy
Module 13: Maintaining and Monitoring Microsoft System Center Configuration
Manager 2007
Module 14: Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2007 Native Mode and
Internet-Based Client Management
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
142
Module 2: Planning and Deploying a Single-Site Architecture
Module 3: Planning for and Completing Client Deployment
Module 4: Inventory Collection, Software Metering, and Asset Intelligence
Module 5: Querying and Reporting Data
Module 6: Distributing Software Using Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager
2007
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Virtualization
145
Implementing and Managing Microsoft Desktop Virtualization
Versione:
Audience:
Module 11: Implementing User State Virtualization
This course is intended for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 system and desktop
administrators who will manage and implement desktop and application virtualization
technologies within their networks.
The students for this course typically are responsible for implementing their
organizations’ desktop and application virtualization, or their information technology
(IT) management has directed them to research and/or implement desktop and
application virtualization in the existing environment.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Basic skills with Windows Command line
• Monitoring and Management Tools
• Networking
• AD DS, including Group Policy deployments
• Performance Monitoring
• Troubleshooting
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan desktop virtualization scenarios
• Implement and configure Windows Virtual PC and the Windows XP mode
• Implement Microsoft Enterprise Desktop Virtualization
• Configure and deploy MED-V images
• Manage a MED-V deployment
• Implement App-V servers
• Plan and deploy Application Virtualization clients
• Administer the App-V infrastructure by using the App-V Management Console
• Sequence applications for deployment by using the App-V infrastructure or a
standalone installation
• Configure and use Remote Desktop Services and Remote App programs
• Implement user state virtualization
• Configure and use Virtual Desktop Infrastructure
• Compare and review the various desktop virtualization technologies
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of Desktop Virtualization Scenarios
Module 12: Configuring Virtual Desktop Infrastructure
Module 13: Summary of Desktop Virtualization Technologies
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
144
Module 2: Implementing Windows Virtual PC and Windows XP Mode
Module 3: Implementing Microsoft Enterprise Desktop Virtualization
Module 4: Configuring and Deploying MED-V Images
Module 5: Managing a MED-V Deployment
Module 6: Implementing Microsoft Application Virtualization
Module 7: Planning and Deploying App-V Clients
Module 8: Managing and Administering Application Virtualization
Module 9: Sequencing Applications for Virtualization
Module 10: Configuring Remote Desktop Services and RemoteApp
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Virtualization
147
Implementing and Managing Microsoft Server Virtualization
Versione:
Audience:
The primary audience for this course is Microsoft Windows Server 2008 system
administrators who will manage and implement Server Virtualization technologies
within their network.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Perform server administrator tasks responsible for building and maintaining a
virtualization infrastructure
• Work or consult for a midsize to enterprise-size organization
• Have a basic understanding of server virtualization concepts related to Microsoft or
other third-party virtualization technologies
• Support production, development, testing, high availability, business continuity,
staging, classroom, or hosting environments based upon Windows Server 2008
technology
• Understand a Windows-based network, including Active Directory directory service
• Understand storage technologies, such as Storage Area Network (SAN) including
Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI), Fiber Channel, and Direct Attached
Storage (DAS)
• Understand Windows Server 2008 failover clustering
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe server, desktop, and application virtualization
• Describe how you use Microsoft System Center is to manage the virtual
infrastructure
• Evaluate a network environment for server virtualization
• Plan for the implementation of the Hyper-V server role
• Install the Hyper-V Server Role
• Manage Hyper-V settings and virtual networks
• Create and configure virtual machines
• Manage virtual machine snapshots
• Managing and maintaining the Virtual Machine Connection Tool
• Create and configure virtual machines
• Manage virtual machine snapshots
• Managing and maintaining the Virtual Machine Connection Tool
• Create a new virtual machine using SCVMM 2008 R2
•
•
•
•
Convert a physical server to a virtual machine
Convert and migrate virtual machines
Clone virtual machines
Describe common management tasks and property configuration settings for virtual
machines managed by VMM 2008
• Describe when and how to use virtual machine checkpoints
• Overview of the VMM Library
• Manage profiles and templates
•
•
•
•
•
•
Design fault tolerance for the VMM library
Configure VMM user roles
Install and configure the VMM Self-Service Portal
Describe the Windows Server 2008 R2 Failover Cluster feature
Implement failover clustering with Hyper-V and VMM 2008 R2
Describe how to use the Offline Virtual Machine Servicing Tool to maintain updates
for virtual machines
• Configure Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) and the Offline Virtual Machine
Servicing Tool
• Monitor and manage jobs in VMM 2008 R2s
• Configure System Center Operations Manager integration
• Configure Performance and Resource Optimization (PRO)
• Describe backup and restore options for virtual machines and the VMM database
• Implementing Data Protection Manager for backing up the VMM infrastructure
• Understand the use and role of Remote Desktop Services (RDS)
• Implement the Remote Desktop Session Host
• Implement the Remote Desktop Connection Broker
• Implement the Remote Desktop Virtualization Host
• Configure the Remote Desktop Gateway
• Configure Remote Desktop Web Access
• Configure Remote Desktop Licensing
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Evaluating and Planning for Virtualization
Module 2: Installing and Configuring the Hyper-V Server Role
Module 3: Creating and Configuring Virtual Hard Disks and Virtual Machines
Module 4: Integrating System Center Virtual Machine Manager with Microsoft Hyper-V
Server 2008 R2
Module 5: Creating and Deploying Virtual Machines Using System Center Virtual
Machine Manager 2008 R2
Module 6: Managing Virtual Machines Using Virtual Machine Manager 2008
Module 7: Configuring and Managing the VMM Library
Module 8: Configuring User Roles and the Virtual Machine Manager Self-Service Portal
Module 9: Implementing High Availability for Server Virtualization
Module 10: Maintaining Software Updates Using the Offline Virtual Machine Servicing
Tool
Module 11: Monitoring and Reporting Virtualization
Module 12: Backup and Restore Strategies for Virtual Machines
Module 13: Desktop Virtualization Using Remote Desktop Services
Module 14: Extending Remote Desktop Services Outside the Organization
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
146
Visual Studio - Linguaggi
149
Developing ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Module 4: Developing ASP.NET MVC 4 Controllers
This course is intended for professional web developers who use Microsoft Visual Studio
in an individual-based or team-based, small-sized to large development environment.
Candidates for this course are interested in developing advanced web applications and
want to manage the rendered HTML comprehensively. They want to create websites
that separate the user interface, data access, and application logic.
A minimum of two to three years of experience developing web-based applications
by using Microsoft Visual Studio and Microsoft ASP.NET, proficiency in using the .NET
Framework, and some familiarity with the C# language.
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the Microsoft Web Technologies stack and select an appropriate
technology to use to develop any given application
• Design the architecture and implementation of a web application that will meet a
set of functional requirements, user interface requirements, and address business
models
• Create MVC Models and write code that implements business logic within Model
methods, properties, and events
• Add Controllers to an MVC Application to manage user interaction, update models,
and select and return Views
• Create Views in an MVC application that display and edit data and interact with
Models and Controllers
• Run unit tests and debugging tools against a web application in Visual Studio 2012
and configure an application for troubleshooting
• Develop a web application that uses the ASPNET routing engine to present friendly
URLs and a logical navigation hierarchy to users
• Implement a consistent look and feel, including corporate branding, across an entire
MVC web application
• Use partial page updates and caching to reduce the network bandwidth used by an
application and accelerate responses to user requests
• Write JavaScript code that runs on the client-side and utilizes the jQuery script
library to optimize the responsiveness of an MVC web application
• Implement a complete membership system in an MVC 4 web application
• Build an MVC application that resists malicious attacks and persists information
about users and preferences
• Describe how to write a Windows Azure web service and call it from and MVC
application
• Describe what a Web API is and why developers might add a Web API to an
application
• Modify the way browser requests are handled by an MVC application
• Describe how to package and deploy an ASPNET MVC 4 web application from a
development computer to a web server for staging or production
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Exploring ASP.NET MVC 4
Module 5: Developing ASP.NET MVC 4 Views
Module 6: Testing and Debugging ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 7: Structuring ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 8: Applying Styles to ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 9: Building Responsive Pages in ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 10: Using JavaScript and jQuery for Responsive MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 11: Controlling Access to ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 12: Building a Resilient ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Application
Module 13: Using Windows Azure Web Services in ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 14: Implementing Web APIs in ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 15: Handling Requests in ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 16: Deploying ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
148
Module 2: Designing ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Applications
Module 3: Developing ASP.NET MVC 4 Models
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Visual Studio - Linguaggi
151
Programming in C#
Versione:
Module 12: Creating Reusable Types and Assemblies
Audience:
This course is intended for experienced developers who already have programming
experience in C, C++, JavaScript, Objective-C, Microsoft Visual Basic, or Java and
understand the concepts of object-oriented programming.
Prerequisiti:
Developers attending this course should already have gained some limited experience
using C# to complete basic programming tasks.
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the core syntax and features of C#
• Create and call methods, catch and handle exceptions, and describe the monitoring
requirements of large-scale applications
• Implement the basic structure and essential elements of a typical desktop
application
• Create classes, define and implement interfaces, and create and use generic
collections
• Use inheritance to create a class hierarchy, extend a NET Framework class, and
create generic classes and methods
• Read and write data by using file input/output and streams, and serialize and
deserialize data in different formats
• Create and use an entity data model for accessing a database and use LINQ to query
and update data
• Use the types in the SystemNet namespace and WCF Data Services to access and
query remote data
• Build a graphical user interface by using XAML
• Improve the throughput and response time of applications by using tasks and
asynchronous operations
• Integrate unmanaged libraries and dynamic components into a C# application
• Examine the metadata of types by using reflection, create and use custom
attributes, generate code at runtime, and manage assembly versions
• Encrypt and decrypt data by using symmetric and asymmetric encryption
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Review of C# Syntax
Module 13: Encrypting and Decrypting Data
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
150
Module 2: Creating Methods, Handling Exceptions, and Monitoring Applications
Module 3: Developing the Code for a Graphical Application
Module 4: Creating Classes and Implementing Type-safe Collections
Module 5: Creating a Class Hierarchy by Using Inheritance
Module 6: Reading and Writing Local Data
Module 7: Accessing a Database
Module 8: Accessing Remote Data
Module 9: Designing the User Interface for a Graphical Application
Module 10: Improving Application Performance and Responsiveness
Module 11: Integrating with Unmanaged Code
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Visual Studio - Linguaggi
153
Programming in HTML5 with JavaScript and CSS3
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Module 4: Creating Forms to Collect Data and Validate User Input
The course is intended for developers who have at least six months of professional
experience and who are interested in developing applications using HTML5 with
JavaScript and CSS3 (either Windows Store apps or IE10 apps for the Web). While
the students may have little or no HTML5 coding experience, they should have some
experience with HTML4.
Before attending this course, students must have at least three months professional
development experience.
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training
should have a combination of practical and conceptual knowledge related to HTML5
programming. This includes the following prerequisites:
• Understand the basic HTML document structure:
• Use HTML tags to display text content
• Use HTML tags to display graphics
• Use HTML APIs
• Understand how to style common HTML elements using CSS, including:
• Separating presentation from content
• Managing content flow
• Managing positioning of individual elements
• Managing content overflow
• Basic CSS styling
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the core syntax and features of C#
• Explain how to use Visual Studio 2012 to create and run a Web application
• Describe the new features of HTML5, and create and style HTML5 pages
• Add interactivity to an HTML5 page by using JavaScript
• Create HTML5 forms by using different input types, and validate user input by using
HTML5 attributes and JavaScript code
• Send and receive data to and from a remote data source by using XMLHTTPRequest
objects and jQuery AJAX operations
• Style HTML5 pages by using CSS3
• Create well-structured and easily-maintainable JavaScript code
• Use common HTML5 APIs in interactive Web applications
• Create Web applications that support offline operations
• Create HTML5 Web pages that can adapt to different devices and form factors
• Add advanced graphics to an HTML5 page by using Canvas elements, and by using
and Scalable Vector Graphics
• Enhance the user experience by adding animations to an HTML5 page
• Use Web Sockets to send and receive data between a Web application and a server
• Improve the responsiveness of a Web application that performs long-running
operations by using Web Worker processes
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of HTML and CSS
Module 5: Communicating with a Remote Data Source
Module 6: Styling HTML5 by Using CSS3
Module 7: Creating Objects and Methods by Using JavaScript
Module 8: Creating Interactive Pages using HTML5 API
Module 9: Adding Offline Support to Web Applications
Module 10: Implementing an Adaptive User Interface
Module 11: Creating Advanced Graphics
Module 12: Animating the User Interface
Module 13: Implementing Real-Time Communications by Using Web Sockets
Module 14: Creating a Web Worker Process
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
152
Module 2: Creating and Styling HTML5 Pages
Module 3: Introduction to JavaScript
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Visual Studio 2010
155
Developing Data Access Solutions with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for professional .NET software developers who use Microsoft
Visual Studio in a team-based, medium-sized to large development environment. They
will have experience implementing data access and data binding within their Web and/
or Windows client applications and are interested in learning to optimize data access
code in their applications by using the Entity Framework, LINQ, and ADO.NET.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• An understanding of the problem-solving techniques that apply to software
development
• A basic understanding of the following scripting techniques and some hands-on
experience writing scripts
• A general understanding of the purpose, function, and features of following .NET
Framework topics
• Experience in N-Tier application design and development
• Data access experience in Windows client application development
• Data access experience in Web application development
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Evaluate a variety of business cases, and then select an appropriate combination of
data access technologies and tools most appropriate to each case Describe the roles
of Entity Framework, WCF Data Services, and ADONET for building and maintaining
applications Use LINQ on top of these technologies to improve productivity and the
quality of their applications
• Use the tools provided with the Entity Framework to map the conceptual model
used by the business logic of an application to the logical data model provided by a
database
• Query an Entity Data Model (EDM) by using common methods such as LINQ to
Entities, Entity SQL, and the classes in the EntityClient namespace
• Perform data modification tasks on data in an EDM
• Explain the function of the Object Services model implemented by the Entity
Framework and the support provided by the Object Services API for addressing the
issues faced by enterprise applications that have to handle multiple concurrent
users simultaneously accessing the same data
• Describe best practices for designing and building a scalable, optimized data access
layer by using Object Services
• Customize and extend entities with their own business logic and use advanced
mappings to shape the data model to their business and application requirements
• Reuse existing business classes in a data access layer built by using the Entity
Framework
• Address the architectural issues that can arise when building an n-tier enterprise
application by using the Entity Framework
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
• Build extensible solutions that can update data in an n-tier enterprise application by
using the Entity Framework
• Access offline data or data that that has limited availability in client applications
• Design, develop, and consume a simple WCF Data Service
• Use WCF Data Services to update and delete data and to handle multi-user concerns
• Develop high performance, scalable ADONET applications that can query and
update data
• Explain how LINQ to SQL enables development against a logical model which
abstracts the low-level details of querying ADONET tables and result sets
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Architecture and Data Access Technologies
Module 2: Building Entity Data Models
Module 3: Querying Entity Data
Module 4: Creating, Updating, and Deleting Entity Data
Module 5: Handling Multi-User Scenarios by Using Object Services
Module 6: Building Optimized Solutions by Using Object Services
Module 7: Customizing Entities and Building Custom Entity Classes
Module 8: Using POCO Classes with the Entity Framework
Module 9: Building an N-Tier Solution by Using the Entity Framework
Module 10: Handling Updates in an N-Tier Solution by Using the Entity Framework
Module 11: Building Occasionally Connected Solutions
Module 12: Querying Data by Using WCF Data Services
Module 13: Updating Data by Using WCF Data Services
Module 14: Using ADO.NET
Module 15: Using LINQ to SQL
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
154
Visual Studio 2010
157
Developing Web Applications with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
Audience:
Module 11: Applying Master Pages and CSS
This course is intended for professional Web developers who use Microsoft Visual Studio
in a team-based, medium-sized to large development environment. Members of the
audience have a minimum of two to three years of experience developing Web-based
applications by using Microsoft Visual Studio and Microsoft ASP.NET.
Module 12: Developing Client Side Scripts and Services
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional Web development experience, students who attend this
training should have the following technical knowledge:
• An understanding of the problem-solving techniques that apply to software
development, including the following principles of software development
• A basic understanding of the following scripting techniques and some hands-on
experience writing scripts
• A general understanding of the purpose, function, and features of following .NET
Framework topics
• Experience using Visual Studio 2008
• Experience in N-Tier application design and development
Module 15: Developing a Web Application by Using Silverlight
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the underlying architecture and design of a Web application
• Apply best practices and make appropriate trade-offs based on business
requirements when designing a Web application
• Develop MVC models
• Develop MVC controllers
• Develop MVC views
• Optimize the design of a Web application for discoverability by search engines
• Write server-side code for Web Forms
• Optimize data management for Web Forms
• Ensure quality by debugging, unit testing, and refactoring
• Secure a Web application
• Apply Master Pages and CSS for a consistent application UI
• Develop client-side scripts and services for a responsive, rich, and interactive UI
• Implement advanced AJAX in a Web application
• Deploy a Web application
• Develop a Web application by using Silverlight
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of Web Application Design
Module 13: Implementing Advanced AJAX in a Web Application
Module 14: Deploying a Web Application
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
156
Module 2: Designing a Web Application
Module 4: Developing MVC Controllers
Module 5: Developing MVC Views
Module 6: Designing for Discoverability
Module 7: Writing Server-Side Code for Web Forms
Module 8: Optimizing Data Management for Web Forms
Module 9: Ensuring Quality by Debugging, Unit Testing, and Refactoring
Module 10: Securing a Web Application
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Visual Studio 2010
159
Developing Windows Applications with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Module 9: Integrating Localization and User Assistance Features
This course is intended for Technology Specialists in the area of Windows Client
Development who work in a development environment that uses Microsoft Visual
Studio .NET 2010 and Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 to create rich client applications for
Windows.
Module 10: WPF 2D Graphics, Multimedia, and Printing
• An understanding of the problem-solving techniques that apply to software
development, including the following principles of software development
• A general understanding of the purpose, function, and features of following .NET
Framework topics
• Experience in N-Tier application design and development
• Implementing basic security best practices in .NET Applications
Module 13: Animations in WPF
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Understand how varying business requirements influence the design decisions
when planning a Windows Client application
• Understand the new features of Visual Studio 2010 WPF
• Design and build a UI that provides the expected end-user experience and UI
functionality
• Create a consistent and manageable user interface
• Understand best practices when testing and learn how to debug their applications
• Use advanced exception handling in Windows Client application scenarios
• Implement advanced data binding scenarios
• Use coding techniques to improve the responsiveness of their applications
• Implement localization, user assistance, and accessibility features within an
application
• Understand the basics of graphics in WPF
• Customize controls and introduce students to custom controls
• Implement application behaviors based on user actions or events by using attached
properties and Expression Blend behaviors
• Develop data visualization within their applications in a manner that enables the
application user to drill down into data visually
• Manage application state and settings throughout the application lifecycle
• Deploy their applications using the various methods supported by Visual Studio
2010
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Windows Client Application Design
Module 11: Control Customization
Module 12: Attached Properties and Behaviors in WPF
Module 14: Application State, Settings, and Lifecycle
Module 15: Configure and Deploy Windows Client Applications
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
158
Module 2: Introduction to Visual Studio 2010 and WPF Version 4
Module 3: Designing and Developing a User Interface
Module 4: Taking Control of the User Interface
Module 5: Testing, Unit Testing, and Debugging
Module 6: Simple Data Binding and Validation
Module 7: Data Binding to Collections
Module 8: Enhancing UI Responsiveness
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Visual Studio 2010
Visual Studio 2010
Developing Windows Communication Foundation Solutions with
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
161
Fundamentals of XAML and Microsoft Expression Blend
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for professional .NET programmers who use Microsoft Visual
Studio in a team-based, medium-sized to large development environment. Students
should have experience consuming services within their Web and/or Windows client
applications and be interested in learning to develop service-oriented applications (SOA)
using WCF.
Audience:
The target audience for this training course is professional developers who have
experience creating Windows Forms and ASP.NET Web application with Visual Studio
2010, and who are interested in learning the core and essential XAML programming
tasks that are required for professional Silverlight 4 and WPF programming in both
Visual Studio 2010 and Expression Blend 4 environments.
Prerequisiti:
• Understanding of the problem-solving techniques that apply to software
development.
• General understanding of the purpose, function, and features of the .NET
Framework.
• Experience developing software using Visual Studio 2008 or Visual Studio 2010.
• Experience in object-oriented design and development using the C# programming
language.
• Experience in n-tier application design and development.
Prerequisiti:
In addition to the professional experience, this course requires that student meet the
following prerequisites:
• 1-3 months of professional programming experience with Visual Studio 2010
• In addition to the technical knowledge, students who attend this training should
have hands-on experience in the following areas:
• Some professional experience in developing either ASPNET Web applications or
Windows Forms desktop applications
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Implement Service-Oriented Architecture tenets in WCF services
• Host WCF services in a variety of Windows hosts
• Define and implement WCF service contracts, data contracts, and message contracts
• Use multiple endpoints with various messaging patterns
• Test, troubleshoot, monitor, and diagnose WCF services
• Ensure service reliability using transactions and message queues
• Secure WCF services using message and transport security
• Extend WCF using behaviors, dispatchers, inspectors, and formatters
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
3 days
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe XAML-based applications and the tools they can use to build them
• Create vector graphics with both Expression Blend 4 and Expression Design 4
• Create a Silverlight application and a user interface by using various layout controls
and other controls from the toolbox
• Work with key parts and logic of a Silverlight application, such as hosting controls,
App events, and InitParams
• Create XAML objects programmatically
• Work with Resources, Styles, Control Templates, and Behaviors
• Implement Transforms, Animations, and Visual States in XAML-based applications
• Prototype applications by using SketchFlow
Contenuti
Module 1: Service-Oriented Architecture
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Binding in XAML
Module 2: Getting Started with Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation
Development
Module 2: Creating Vector Graphics with Expression Studio 4
Module 3: Hosting Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation Services
Module 3: Laying out a XAML-Based Application
Module 4: Defining and Implementing Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation
Contracts
Module 4: Developing and Debugging XAML-Based Applications
Module 5: Endpoints and Behaviors
Module 6: Testing and Troubleshooting Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation
Services
Module 7: Security
Module 8: Introduction to Advanced Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation
Topics
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Module 5: Creating Controls Programmatically and Working with Media Files
Module 6: Working with Resources, Styles, Control Templates, and Behaviors
Module 7: Implementing Transforms, Animations, and Visual States
Module 8: Binding in XAML
Module 9: Prototyping Applications by Using SketchFlow in Expression Blend 4
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
160
Visual Studio 2010
Introduction to HTML5
Versione:
Visual Studio 2010
163
Introduction to Web Development with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for students who have experience with HTML 4, basic CSS, and
basic Java Script. Students will start by getting their hands dirty and jumping right into
HTML5 code.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• HTML 4
• Basic CSS
• Basic Java Script
• Experience in the following areas is beneficial:
• JSON
• DOM
• Ajax
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Start building HTML5 pages
• Understand the major benefits of HTML5
• Understand the difference between HTML5 and HTML 4
• Be familiar with HTML5’s new elements and attributes
• Work with audio and video in HTML5
• Work with HTML5’s new Canvas element to create code-based drawings
• Use Web Storage for offline applications
• Use all the cool new HTML5 form elements
• Understand the current state of browser support for HTML5 and how to make
HTML5 sites degrade gracefully
Durata:
2 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Laying out a Page with HTML5
Audience:
This course is intended for Web developers who are beginners and have knowledge
of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) or Dynamic HTML (DHTML), along with some
knowledge of a scripting language such as Visual Basic Scripting Edition or Microsoft
Jscript.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have at least one month of experience in
.NET technologies. In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this
training should have the following technical knowledge:
• Knowledge of HTML or DHTML
• Tables
• Images
• Forms
• Programming experience using Visual Basic .NET or Visual C# .NET, including:
• Declaring variables
• Using loops
• Using conditional statements
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Explore ASPNET Web applications in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
• Create Web applications by using Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft NET–
based languages
• Create a Microsoft ASPNET Web Form
• Add functionality to a Microsoft ASPNET Web Form
• Implement master pages and user controls
• Validate user input
• Debug Microsoft ASPNET Web applications
• Manage data in an ASPNET 35 Web application
• Manage data access tasks by using LINQ
• Manage data by using ASPNET Dynamic Data
• Create a Microsoft ASPNET AJAX application
• Consume and Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) services
• Manage state in Web applications
• Configure and deploy a Microsoft ASPNET Web application
• Secure a Microsoft ASPNET Web application
• Implement new technologies supported by Visual Studio 2010 for Web
development
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Exploring Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications in Microsoft Visual Studio
2010
Module 2: HTML5 - How We Got Here
Module 3: Sections and Articles
Module 4: HTML5 Audio and Video
Module 5: HTML5 Forms
Module 6: HTML5 Web Storage
Module 7: HTML5 Canvas
Module 8: Integrated APIs
Module 2: Creating Web Applications by Using Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and
Microsoft .NET–Based Languages
Module 3: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form
Module 4: Adding Functionality to a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Form
Module 5: Implementing Master Pages and User Controls
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
162
Visual Studio 2010
164
165
Programming in C# with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
Module 7: Troubleshooting Microsoft ASP.NET Web Applications
Audience:
This course is intended for experienced developers who already have programming
experience in C, C++, Visual Basic, or Java and understand the concepts of objectoriented programming.
This course is not designed for new programmers; it is targeted at professional
developers with at least 12 months experience of programming in an object-oriented
environment.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• At least 12 months experience working with an Object Oriented language
• Have C++ or Java knowledge:
• Creating Classes
• Inheritance and Abstraction
• Polymorphism
• Interfaces
• Exceptions
• Knowledge of the Visual Studio IDE
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Explain the purpose of the NET Framework, and understand how to use C# and
Visual Studio 2010 to build NET Framework applications
• Understand the syntax of basic C# programming constructs
• Create and call methods in a C# application
• Catch, handle and throw exceptions
• Perform basic file IO operations in a C# application
• Create and use new types (enumerations, classes, and structures), and understand
the differences between reference types and value types
• Control the visibility and lifetime of members in a type
• Use inheritance to create new reference types
• Manage the lifetime of objects and control the use of resources
• Define properties and indexers to encapsulate data, and define operators for this
data
• Decouple an operation from the method that implements an operation, and use
these decoupled operations to handle asynchronous events
• Use collections to aggregate data, and use Generics to implement type-safe
collection classes, structures, interfaces, and methods
• Implement custom collection classes that support enumeration
• Query in-memory data by using LINQ
• Integrate code written by using a dynamic language such as Ruby and Python, or
technologies such as COM, into a C# application
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introducing C# and the .NET Framework
Module 8: Managing Data in an Microsoft ASP.NET 4.0 Web Application
Module 9: Managing Data Access Tasks by Using LINQ
Module 10: Managing Data by Using Microsoft ASP.NET Dynamic Data
Module 11: Creating a Microsoft ASP.NET Ajax-enabled Web Forms Application
Module 12: Consuming Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation Services
Module 13: Managing State in Web Applications
Module 14: Configuring and Deploying a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Application
Module 15: Securing a Microsoft ASP.NET Web Application
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 16: Implementing Advanced Technologies Supported by Microsoft Visual Studio
2010 for Web Development
Module 2: Using C# Programming Constructs
Module 3: Declaring and Calling Methods
Module 4: Handling Exceptions
Module 5: Reading and Writing Files
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 6: Validating User Input
Visual Studio 2010
166
167
Programming in Visual Basic with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Versione:
Module 7: Encapsulating Data and Methods
Audience:
This course is intended for experienced developers who already have programming
experience in Visual Basic, C, C++, C#, or Java, and understand the concepts of Object
Oriented Programming. These developers will be likely to develop enterprise business
solutions.
Prerequisiti:
This course requires that you meet the following prerequisites:
• This course is targeted at developers who already have Visual Basic knowledge
• This course is not for new developers; at least 12 months experience working with
an Object Oriented language is expected
• Creating classes
• Inheritance and abstraction
• Polymorphism
• Interfaces
• Delegates
• Events
• Exceptions
• Experience with the Microsoft NET Framework
• Knowledge of the Visual Studio integrated development environment (IDE)
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the purpose of the NET Framework, and explain how to use Microsoft
Visual Basic and Visual Studio 2010 to build NET Framework applications
• Describe the syntax of basic Visual Basic programming constructs
• Describe how to create and call methods
• Describe how to catch, handle, and throw exceptions
• Describe how to perform basic file I/O operations in a Visual Basic application
• Describe how to create and use new types (enumerations, classes, and structures),
and explain the differences between reference types and value types
• Describe how to control the visibility and lifetime of members in a type
• Describe how to use inheritance to create new reference types
• Describe how to manage the lifetime of objects and control the use of resources
• Describe how to create properties and indexers to encapsulate data, and explain
how to define operators for this data
• Describe how to decouple an operation from the method that implements it, and
explain how to use these decoupled operations to handle asynchronous events
• Describe the purpose of collections, and explain how to use generics to implement
type-safe collection classes, structures, interfaces, and methods
• Describe how to implement custom collection classes that support enumeration
• Describe how to query in-memory data by using Language-Integrated Query (LINQ)
queries
• Describe how to integrate code written by using a dynamic language such as Ruby
and Python, or technologies such as Component Object Model (COM), into a Visual
Basic application
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introducing Visual Basic and the .NET Framework
Module 8: Inheriting From Classes and Implementing Interfaces
Module 9: Managing the Lifetime of Objects and Controlling Resources
Module 10: Encapsulating Data and Defining Overloaded Operators
Module 11: Decoupling Methods and Handling Events
Module 12: Using Collections and Building Generic Types
Module 13: Building and Enumerating Custom Collection Classes
Module 14: Using LINQ to Query Data
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 15: Integrating Visual C# Code with Dynamic Languages and COM Components
Module 2: Using Visual Basic Programming Constructs
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 6: Creating New Types
Visual Studio 2010
168
169
Windows Azure Solutions with Microsoft Visual Studio 2010
Module 3: Declaring and Calling Methods
Versione:
Module 4: Handling Exceptions
Audience:
This class is designed for .NET developers with Web application experience that are
exploring developing new applications or porting existing applications to Windows
Azure.
Prerequisiti:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Understand cloud computing in its various forms and how Windows Azure fits in the
cloud computing space
• Learn why organizations want to run applications in the Azure cloud
• Understand the architecture of Azure
• Explore the Azure SDK and development environment (Compute and Storage
Emulators)
• See how to develop applications for Azure and how that varies from “normal” NET
application development
• Write and deploy an ASPNET Web application (Web Role) to Azure
• Learn how to create and deploy background computational applications (Worker
Role) in Azure
• Explore Azure Storage capability to include table, queue and blob storage
• Examine SQL Azure, the relational database in the cloud
• Study how SQL Azure differs from Azure Storage
Module 5: Reading and Writing Files
Module 6: Creating New Types
Module 7: Encapsulating Data and Methods
Module 8: Inheriting from Classes and Implementing Interfaces
Module 9: Managing the Lifetime of Objects and Controlling Resources
Module 10: Encapsulating Data and Defining Overloaded Operators
Module 11: Decoupling Methods and Handling Events
Module 12: Using Collections and Building Generic Types
Module 13: Building and Enumerating Custom Collection Classes
Module 14: Using LINQ to Query Data
Module 15: Integrating Visual Basic Code with Dynamic Languages and COM
Components
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Cloud Computing
Module 2: Windows Azure Architecture
Module 3: Windows Azure Web Roles
Module 4: Local Storage.
Module 5: Windows Azure Administration
Module 6: Windows Azure Storage and Queues
Module 7: Blob Storage
Module 8: Table Storage
Module 9: Worker Roles
Module 10: SQL Azure Introduction
Module 11: Diagnostics
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Obiettivi
formativi:
Windows Azure
Windows Azure
Advanced SQL Azure
Versione:
171
Developing Windows Azure and Web Services
Versione:
Audience:
IT Pros that want to learn to maintain SQL Azure databases and architects that want to
learn to leverage SQL Azure in their applications.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Understanding of basic SQL concepts (TSQL and tables)
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Learn to design high performance cloud based data storage solutions using SQL
Azure. Topics include security, programming, maintaining, optimizing, migrating and
synchronizing with SQL Azure. SQL Azure Reporting is also explored.
Durata:
4 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview
Audience:
This course is intended for both novice and experienced .NET developers who have a
minimum of six months programming experience, and want to learn how to develop
services and deploy them to hybrid environments.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Experience with C# programming, and concepts such as Lambda expressions, LINQ,
and anonymous types
• Understanding the concepts of n-tier applications
• Experience with querying and manipulating data with ADONET
• Knowledge of XML data structures
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Query and manipulate data with Entity Framework
• Use ASPNET Web API to create HTTP-based services and consume them from NET
and non-NET clients
• Extend ASPNET Web API services using message handlers, model binders, action
filters, and media type formatters
• Create SOAP-based services with the Windows Communication Foundation (WCF)
and consume them from NET clients
• Apply design principles to service contracts and extend WCF services using custom
runtime components and behaviors
• Secure WCF services using transport and message security
• Use Windows Azure Service Bus for relayed messaging and brokered messaging
using queues and topics
• Host services on on-premises servers, and on various Windows Azure environments,
such as Web Roles, Worker Roles, and Web Sites
• Deploy services to both on-premises servers and Windows Azure
• Store and access data in Windows Azure Storage, and configure storage access
rights
• Monitor and log services, both on-premises and in Windows Azure
• Implement federated authentication by using ACS with ASPNET Web API services
• Create scalable, load-balanced services
Durata:
4 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of service and cloud technologies
Module 2: Introduction to SQL Azure
Module 3: SQL Azure RDBMS Support
Module 4: SQL Azure Security
Module 5: Programming SQL Azure
Module 6: Maintaining and Optimizing SQL Azure
Module 7: Migrating and Synchronizing to SQL Azure
Module 8: Business Intelligence with SQL Azure
Module 2: Querying and manipulating data using Entity Framework
Module 3: Creating and consuming ASP.NET Web API services
Module 4: Extending and securing ASP.NET Web API services
Module 5: Creating WCF services
Module 6: Designing and extending WCF services
Module 7: Implementing Security in WCF services
Module 8: Windows Azure Service Bus
Module 9: Hosting services
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
170
Windows Desktop
172
173
Configuring Windows 8
Versione:
Module 11: Windows Azure Storage
Audience:
This course is intended for IT professionals who configure or support Windows 8
computers, devices, users and associated network and security resources. The networks
with which these professionals typically work are configured as a single domain-based
or peer-to-peer environment with access to the Internet and cloud services. The IT
professional could be a consultant, full-time desktop support technician, or an IT
generalist who administers Windows 8-based computers and devices as a portion of
their broader technical responsibilities.
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• Networking fundamentals, including Transmission Control Protocol /Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP), and Domain Name System (DNS)
• Microsoft Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) principles and fundamentals of
AD DS management
• Understanding of the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) components and working
knowledge of the fundamentals of Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS)
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 fundamentals
• Microsoft Windows Client fundamentals; for example, working knowledge of
Windows XP, Windows Vista, and/or Windows 7
• Fundamentals of management and experience using the Microsoft Office 2010
system or the Microsoft Office 2007 system
• Windows Automated Installation Kit (WAIK) components including Windows PE,
Windows SIM, VAMT, ImageX, USMT, and DISM concepts and fundamentals
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan and perform the installation of Windows 8
• Install Windows 8 on computers that are running an existing operating system
• Configure disks, partitions, volumes, and device drivers in a Windows 8 system
• Configure network connectivity
• Install, configure, and maintain wireless network connections
• Implement Windows 8 technologies to secure network connections
• Share files and printers
• Implement tools and technologies that can help secure Windows 8 desktops
• Configure and control applications in Windows 8
• Optimize and maintain Windows 8 based computers
• Configure mobile computer settings and to enable remote access
• Create and configure virtual machines in Hyper-V for Windows 8 and describe how
to use it to support legacy applications
• Determine how to recover Windows 8 from various failures
• Describe how to use Windows PowerShell to manage Windows 8
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Installing Windows 8
Module 12: Monitoring and diagnostics
Module 13: Identity management and access control
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 14: Scaling Services
Module 2: Upgrading and Migrating to Windows 8
Module 3: Managing Disks and Device Drivers
Module 4: Configuring and Troubleshooting Network Connections
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 10: Deploying Services
Windows Desktop
174
175
Installing and Configuring Windows 7 Client
Versione:
Module 6: Implementing Network Security
Audience:
This course is intended for IT professionals who are interested in:
• Expanding their knowledge base and technical skills about Windows 7 Client
• Acquiring deep technical knowledge of Windows 7
• Learning the details of Windows 7 technologies
• Focusing on the “how to” associated with Windows 7 technologies
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Experience installing PC hardware and devices
• Basic understanding of TCP/IP and networking concepts
• Basic Windows and Active Directory knowledge
• The skills to map network file shares
• Experience working from a command prompt
• Basic knowledge of the fundamentals of applications For example, how client
computer applications communicate with the server
• Basic understanding of security concepts such as authentication and authorization
• An understanding of the fundamental principles of using printers
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Perform a clean installation of Windows 7, upgrade to Windows 7, and migrate userrelated data and settings from an earlier version of Windows
• Configure disks, partitions, volumes, and device drivers to enable a Windows 7
client computer
• Configure file access and printers on a Windows 7 client computer
• Configure network connectivity on a Windows 7 client computer
• Configure wireless network connectivity on a Windows 7 client computer
• Secure Windows 7 client desktop computers
• Optimize and maintain the performance and reliability of a Windows 7 client
computer
• Configure mobile computing and remote access settings for a Windows 7 client
computer
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Installing, Upgrading, and Migrating to Windows 7
Module 7: Configuring File Access and Printers on Windows 8 Clients
Module 8: Securing Windows 8 Desktops
Module 9: Configuring Applications
Module 10: Optimizing and Maintaining Windows 8 Client Computers
Module 11: Configuring Mobile Computing and Remote Access
Module 12: Implementing Hyper-V
Module 13: Troubleshooting and Recovering Windows 8
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 14: Using Windows PowerShell
Module 2: Configuring Disks and Device Drivers
Module 3: Configuring File Access and Printers on Windows 7 Client Computers
Module 4: Configuring Network Connectivity
Module 5: Configuring Wireless Network Connections
Module 6: Securing Windows 7 Desktop
Module 7: Optimizing and Maintaining Windows 7 Client Computers
Module 8: Configuring Mobile Computing and Remote Access in Windows 7
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 5: Implementing Wireless Network Connections
Windows Desktop
177
Planning and Managing Windows 7 Desktop Deployments and
Environments
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Module 2: Assessing Application Compatibility in Windows 7
This course is intended for IT Professionals who are interested in specializing in Windows
7 desktop and application deployments and managing the desktop environments for
large organizations. People attending this training could be support technicians or
currently in deployment roles and are looking at taking the next step in their career or
enhancing their skills in the areas of planning and deploying Windows 7 desktops.
Before attending this course, students must have:
• A solid understanding of TCP/IP and networking concepts
• A solid Windows and Active Directory background For example, domain user
accounts, domain vs local user accounts, user profiles, and group membership
• A good understanding of scripts and batch files
• A solid understanding of security concepts such as authentication and authorization
• Performed a clean installation of Windows 7, Upgrade to Windows 7, and migrate
user-related data and settings from Windows XP
• Configured disks, partitions, volumes, and device drivers to enable Windows 7 to
function as desired
• Experience configuring and troubleshooting permissions and other settings to allow
access to resources and applications on Windows 7 Systems
• Experience configuring settings to enable network connectivity
• Experience configuring and troubleshooting a wireless network connection
• Experience configuring and troubleshooting Windows 7 security
• Configure mobile computers and devices
• Familiarity with the client administration capabilities of Windows Server and familiar
with management tools such as the System Center suite of products
• Familiarity with deployment, packaging, and imaging tools
• The ability to work in a team/virtual team
• Trained and mentored others
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Perform a clean installation of Windows 7, upgrade to Windows 7, and migrate userPrepare to deploy Windows 7 business desktops
• Assess and resolve application compatibility issues with Windows 7
• Determine the most appropriate method to deploy Windows 7 based upon specific
business requirements
• Design a standard Windows 7 image by assessing and evaluating the business
requirements
• Deploy Windows 7 by using WAIK
• Deploy Windows 7 by using WDS
• Deploy Windows 7 by using Lite Touch Installation
• Deploy Windows 7 by using Zero Touch Installation
• Migrate user state by using Windows Easy Transfer and User State Migration Tool 40
• Design, configure, and manage the Windows 7 client environment
• Plan and deploy applications and updates to Windows 7 client computers
• Plan and deploy Windows 7 by using LTI (Lab-Only Module)
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Preparing to Deploy Windows 7 Business Desktops
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Module 3: Evaluating Windows 7 Deployment Methods
Module 4: Designing Standard Windows 7 Images
Module 5: Deploying Windows 7 by Using WAIK
Module 6: Deploying Windows 7 by Using Windows Deployment Services
Module 7: Deploying Windows 7 by Using Lite Touch Installation
Module 8: Deploying Windows 7 by Using Zero Touch Installation
Module 9: Migrating User State by Using WET and USMT 4.0
Module 10: Designing, Configuring, and Managing the Client Environment
Module 11: Planning and Deploying Applications and Updates to Windows 7 Clients
Module 12: Deploying Windows 7 – Challenge Scenario
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
176
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Windows Desktop
Windows Server 2008
Troubleshooting and Supporting Windows 7 in the Enterprise
Versione:
Automating Windows Server 2008 Administration with Windows
PowerShell
Versione:
Audience:
The primary audience for this course is the Enterprise Desktop Support Technician
(EDST) providing Tier 2 support. The secondary audience for this course is the Desktop
Support Technician (DST) in an Upper MORG Organization.
Prerequisiti:
In addition to their professional experience, students who attend this training should
already have the following technical knowledge:
• Networking fundamentals, including Transmission Control Protocol /Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP), and Domain Name System (DNS)
• Microsoft Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) principles and fundamentals of
AD DS management
• Understanding of the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) components and working
knowledge of the fundamentals of Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS)
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 fundamentals
• Microsoft Windows Client fundamentals; for example, working knowledge of
Windows XP, Windows Vista, and/or Windows 7
• Fundamentals of management and experience using the Microsoft Office 2010
system or the Microsoft Office 2007 system
• Windows Automated Installation Kit (WAIK) components including Windows PE,
Windows SIM, VAMT, ImageX, USMT, and DISM concepts and fundamentals
Obiettivi
formativi:
179
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the processes of establishing and using a troubleshooting methodology,
and define the EDST job role and responsibilities
• Troubleshoot startup issues on a Windows 7 computer
• Troubleshoot client-configuration failures and Group Policy object (GPO) application
issues
• Troubleshoot hardware device, device driver, and performance issues
• Troubleshoot network connectivity issues
• Troubleshoot remote connectivity issues
• Troubleshoot logon and resource access issues
• Troubleshoot security system issues, such as Encrypting File Systems (EFS) BitLocker
Drive Encryption, and file permissions
• Troubleshoot operating system and applications issues
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Implementing a Troubleshooting Methodology
Module 2: Troubleshooting Startup Issues
Module 3: Using Group Policy to Centralize Configuration
Audience:
This course is intended for Windows administrators interested in automating Windows
Server 2008 administration tasks, as well as those people looking for a full-featured
interactive command-line environment for Windows operating systems. Windows
end users or developers who need to understand what is involved in Windows
administration or command-line environments may also find this course helpful.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Course 6430: Planning and Administering Windows Server 2008 Servers, or have
equivalent knowledge of administrative tasks
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Install and launch Windows PowerShell
• Work with basic objects in Windows PowerShell, including using cmdlets, data
types, variables, and fundamental object-based information models
• Implement sequences of operations by putting them together into a pipeline
• Control the formatting of the resultant set of objects that are emitted at the end of
a pipeline
• Implement sequences of operations by putting them together into a script
• Implement flow control within scripts and define functions and filters to help
modularize complex scripts
• Manipulate files and registry values
• Manage disk storage volumes, shadow copies, shared folders, Terminal Services and
IIS properties using WMI in Windows PowerShell
• Administer and maintain Active Directory directory services and IIS 70 Web sites
using Windows PowerShell
• Maintain Group Policy using Windows PowerShell
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introduction to Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 2: Overview of Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 3: Building Pipelines for Assembly-Line Style Processing
Module 4: Managing Processes and Formatting Cmdlet Output
Module 5: Introduction to Scripting with Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 6: Implementing Flow Control and Functions
Module 7: Working with Files, the Registry, and Certificate Stores
Module 4: Troubleshooting Hardware Device, Device Driver, and Performance Issues
Module 8: Managing the Windows Operating System Using Microsoft Windows
PowerShell and WMI
Module 5: Troubleshooting Network Connectivity Issues
Module 9: Administering Active Directory with Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 6: Troubleshooting Remote Connectivity Issues
Module 10: Administering Group Policy in Microsoft Windows PowerShell Using COM
Module 7: Troubleshooting Logon and Resource Access Issues
Module 8: Troubleshooting Security Issues
Module 9: Troubleshooting Operating System and Application Issues
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
178
Windows Server 2008
181
Configuring and Troubleshooting a Windows Server 2008 Network
Infrastructure
Versione:
Module 13: Recovering Network Data and Servers
Audience:
This course will be of interest and benefit to attendees with different back grounds and
career aspirations. It will be of interest to Network Administrators who currently are, or
will be, working with Windows Server 2008 servers.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• You must have an intermediate understanding of Windows Server operating systems
such as Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2
Sp1 and Windows client operating systems such as Windows Vista or Windows 7
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan and configure an IPv4 network infrastructure
• Implement DHCP within their organization
• Configure and troubleshoot DNS
• Configure, transition to, and troubleshoot IPv6
• Configure and troubleshoot Routing and Remote Access
• Install, configure, and troubleshoot the Network Policy Server Role service
• Implement Network Access Protection
• Implement security features within Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008
R2
• Implement security features within Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008
R2 that help to secure network communications
• Configure and troubleshot file and print services
• Enable and configure services to optimize branch office data access
• Control and monitor network storage
• Recover data on Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 servers
• Monitor Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server R2 network infrastructure
services
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Planning and Configuring IPv4
Module 14: Monitoring Windows Server 2008 Network Infrastructure Servers
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
180
Module 2: Configuring and Troubleshooting DHCP
Module 3: Configuring and Troubleshooting DNS
Module 4: Configuring and Troubleshooting IPv6 TCP/IP
Module 5: Configuring and Troubleshooting Routing and Remote Access
Module 6: Installing, Configuring, and Troubleshooting the Network Policy Server Role
Service
Module 7: Implementing Network Access Protection
Module 8: Increasing Security for Windows Servers
Module 9: Increasing Security for Network Communication
Module 10: Configuring and Troubleshooting Network File and Print Services
Module 11: Optimizing Data Access for Branch Offices
Module 12: Controlling and Monitoring Network Storage
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Windows Server 2008
Windows Server 2008
Configuring and Troubleshooting Identity and Access Solutions with
Windows Server 2008 Active Directory
Versione:
183
Configuring and Troubleshooting Internet Information Services in
Windows Server 2008
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for those who want to learn how IDA solutions are implemented
in Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2. It is also intended for those
preparing for MCTS: Windows Server 2008 Active Directory certification.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Technical skills in Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS). This includes technical
skills equivalent to 6425C: Configuring Windows Server 2008 Active Directory
Domain Services
• Technical skills in Windows Server 2008 equivalent to 6419B: Configuring, Managing
and Maintaining Windows Server 2008 Servers
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the fundamental IDA components and Windows Server 2008 and Windows
Server 2008 R2 IDA technologies
• Deploy, configure, and troubleshoot Active Directory Certificate Services (AD CS)
• Deploy, configure, and manage certificates
• Deploy, configure, and troubleshoot Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services
(AD LDS)
• Deploy, configure, and troubleshoot Active Directory Federation Services 20 (AD FS
20)
• Deploy, configure, and troubleshoot Active Directory Rights Management Services
(AD RMS)
• Maintain Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Active Directory IDA
Solutions
Audience:
The primary audience for this course is individuals who want to become a Web Server
Administrator in an enterprise environment. Also, individuals who are assuming a new
role requiring skills to manage content served by an IIS 7.0 Web Server over an intranet,
extranet, and internet would be interested in this course.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Course 6420 Foundational Series: Fundamentals of a Windows Server 2008 Network
Infrastructure and Application Platform
or
• A minimum of 1 year of experience administering and supporting a Web Server role
using Windows Server 2003
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the IIS 70 modular architecture and workloads
• Configure an IIS 70 Web Server
• Secure Web sites and Web application pools
• Troubleshoot Web servers, sites and applications
• Use command line tools and scripting tools
• Tune IIS to improve performance
• Maintain Web sites
• Enable integrated technologies to extend IIS 70 functionality
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Configuring an IIS 7.0 Web Server
Durata:
3 days
Module 2: Configuring IIS 7.0 Web Sites and Application Pools
Contenuti
Module 1: Exploring Identity and Access Solutions
Module 3: Configuring IIS 7.0 Application Settings
Module 2: Deploying and Configuring Active Directory Certificate Services
Module 4: Configuring IIS 7.0 Modules
Module 3: Deploying and Configuring Certificates
Module 5: Securing the IIS 7.0 Web Server and Web Sites
Module 4: Deploying and Configuring Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services
Module 6: Configuring Delegation and Remote Administration
Module 5: Deploying and Configuring Active Directory Federation Services
Module 7: Using Command-line and Scripting for IIS 7.0 Administration
Module 6: Deploying and Configuring Active Directory Rights Management Services
Module 8: Tuning IIS 7.0 for Improved Performance
Module 7: Maintaining Windows Server 2008 Active Directory Identity and Access
Solutions
Module 9: Ensuring Web Site Availability with Web Farms
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Module 10: Troubleshooting IIS 7.0 Web Servers
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
182
Windows Server 2008
185
Configuring and Troubleshooting Windows Server 2008 Active
Directory Domain Services
Versione:
Audience:
Module 11: Configuring Domain Name System
This course is intended for Active Directory Technology Specialists, Server and Enterprise
Administrators who want to learn how to implement Active Directory Domain Services
in Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 environments.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Basic understanding of networking
• Intermediate understanding of network operating systems
• An awareness of security best practices
• Basic knowledge of server hardware
• Some experience creating objects in Active Directory
• Basic concepts of backup and recovery in a Windows Server environment
• A good knowledge of Windows Client operating systems such as Windows Vista or
Windows 7
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe the features and functionality of Active Directory Domain Services
• Perform secure and efficient administration of Active Directory
• Manage users and service accounts
• Manage groups
• Manage computer accounts
• Implement a Group Policy infrastructure
• Manage User Desktops with Group Policy
• Manage enterprise security and configuration by using Group Policy settings
• Secure administration
• Improve the security of authentication in an AD DS Domain
• Configure Domain Name System
• Administer AD DS domain controllers
• Manage sites and Active Directory Replication
• Monitor, maintain and back up directory Service to ensure Directory Service
continuity
• Manage multiple domains and forests
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introducing Active Directory Domain Services
Module 12: Administering AD DS Domain Controllers
Module 13: Managing Sites and Active Directory Replication
Module 14: Directory Service Continuity
Module 15: Managing Multiple Domains and Forests
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
184
Module 2: Administering Active Directory Securely and Efficiently
Module 3: Managing Users and Service Accounts
Module 4: Managing Groups
Module 5: Managing Computer Accounts
Module 6: Implementing a Group Policy Infrastructure
Module 7: Managing User Desktop with Group Policy
Module 8: Managing Enterprise Security and Configuration with Group Policy Settings
Module 9: Securing Administration
Module 10: Improving the Security of Authentication in an AD DS Domain
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Windows Server 2008
Windows Server 2008
Configuring and Troubleshooting Windows Server 2008 Application
Infrastructure
Versione:
Deploying Windows Server 2008
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for IT Professional technical specialists who work in the complex
computing environment of a medium to large company and are responsible for the
underlying Microsoft technologies that support a business application infrastructure in
Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Up to one year of experience managing Windows Server 2008 and/or Windows
Server 2008 R2 in a medium-to-large networking environment of multiple physical
locations
• At least two years of experience configuring and managing Windows Vista or
Windows 7 clients
• Experience managing applications and network technologies in an enterprise
environment, which may include network services and resources such as messaging,
databases, file and print, a firewall, Internet access, an intranet, Public Key
Infrastructure, remote access, remote desktop, virtualization, and client computer
management
• Experience managing connectivity requirements such as connecting branch offices
and individual users in remote locations to corporate resources and connecting
corporate networks
Obiettivi
formativi:
187
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Configuring Storage for Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2
Applications
• Configuring High Availability for Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2
Applications
• RDS in the Single-Server Configuration
• RDS in the Multiple-Server Configuration
• Securely Delivering RDS Applications to the Internet
• IIS Web Applications
• IIS FTP and SMTP Services
• IIS Server and SSL Management
• Microsoft SharePoint Foundation
• Windows Streaming Media Services
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Configuring Storage for Windows Server 2008 Applications
Module 2: Configuring High Availability for Windows Server 2008 Applications
Module 3: Configuring Remote Desktop Services
Module 4: RDS in the Multiple-Server Configuration
Module 5: Securely Delivering RDS Applications to the Internet
Module 6: IIS Web Applications
Module 7: IIS FTP and SMTP Services
Module 9: Microsoft SharePoint Foundation
Module 10: Windows Streaming Media Services
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Audience:
This course is intended for information technology (IT) professionals who have
experience with Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008, and who hold an
Microsoft Certified Technology Specialist (MCTS) credentialor Microsoft Certified
IT Professional (MCITP) credential (or Microsoft Certified Systems Engineer (MCSE)
credential or Microsoft Certified Systems Administrator (MCSA) credential) certification
and/or equivalent knowledge.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Able to perform server and desktop installation, upgrades, and configuration
• A conceptual understanding of automated deployment
• A basic understanding of the processes in Microsoft Operations Connector
Framework, Microsoft Solutions Framework, and ITIL 30
• Basic skills with Windows PowerShell 20
• Windows command line
• Understanding of, and experience with, monitoring and management tools
• Networking knowledge
• Knowledge of Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS)
• Knowledge of security
• Understanding of, and experience with, performance monitoring
• Troubleshooting skills
• Familiarity and experience with Windows PowerShell 20, Windows Command line,
scripting of imaging and virtualization technologies, and general batch scripting
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Describe Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 installation and configuration options,
and select an appropriate volume-licensing option for Windows Server 2008 R2
• Deploy and configure a Windows Server 2008 R2 Server Core installation
• Implement various Windows Server deployment technologies
• Implement Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 deployments with Windows
Deployment Services (WDS)
• Implement Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 deployments with Microsoft
Deployment Toolkit 2010 (MDT 2010)
• Migrate earlier versions of Active Directory directory service to AD DS
• Migrate file and print, and Web servers to Windows Server 2008 R2
• Migrate remote infrastructure servers to support branch offices
• Virtualize workloads by migrating physical servers to guests in Microsoft Hyper-V
Server 2008 R2
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Installing and Configuring Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Module 2: Implementing Deployment Technologies
Module 3: Using Windows Deployment Services
Module 4: Implementing the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
Module 5: Migrating Active Directory Directory Service
Module 6: Migrating File, Print, and Web Services
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
186
Windows Server 2008
188
189
Designing Windows Server 2008 Active Directory Infrastructure and
Services
Module 8: Migrating Workloads to Microsoft Virtual Machines
Audience:
The primary audience for this course is IT professionals, including administrators of
Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 Enterprise who want to become
administrators of Windows Server 2008 Enterprise.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• System administrator–level working knowledge
• Up to one year of experience implementing server plans
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Provide an overview of the lab scenario
• Create a design for the Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) forest and forest
trust deployment
• Design an AD DS domain and Domain Name Service (DNS) integration design
• Design AD DS sites and AD DS replication
• Create an AD DS domain controller deployment plan
• Create an AD DS domain administration design and partially implement the design
• Create an AD DS Group Policy design and implement some components of that
design
• Design and implement AD DS security policies that meet security requirements
• Design and implement a PKI deployment by using Active Directory Certificate
Services (AD CS)
• Design an Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) solution and
deploy RMS for internal users
• Create and implement an Active Directory Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS)
design
• Review and validate a Federated Web single sign-on (SSO) deployment
• Design and implement a domain restructure
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Overview of Active Directory Design
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Versione:
Module 2: Designing an AD DS Forest Infrastructure
Module 3: Designing an AD DS Domain Infrastructure
Module 4: Designing AD DS Sites and Replication
Module 5: Designing AD DS Domain Controllers
Module 6: Designing AD DS Domain Administration
Module 7: Designing AD DS Group Policy
Module 8: Designing AD DS Security
Module 9: Designing a Public Key Infrastructure
Module 10: Designing and Deploying AD RMS
Module 11: Designing an AD LDS Infrastructure
Module 12: Designing an AD FS Infrastructure
Module 13: Designing AD DS Transitions
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 7: Deploying Branch Office and Remote Access Services
Windows Server 2008
Designing Windows Server 2008 Network and Applications
Infrastructure
Versione:
Windows Server 2008
191
Implementing and Administering Windows SharePoint Services 3.0 in
Windows Server 2008
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for Windows administrators interested in automating Windows
Server 2008 administration tasks, as well as those people looking for a full-featured
interactive command-line environment for Windows operating systems. Windows
end users or developers who need to understand what is involved in Windows
administration or command-line environments may also find this course helpful.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Course 6430: Planning and Administering Windows Server 2008 Servers, or have
equivalent knowledge of administrative tasks
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Install and launch Windows PowerShell
• Work with basic objects in Windows PowerShell, including using cmdlets, data
types, variables, and fundamental object-based information models
• Implement sequences of operations by putting them together into a pipeline
• Control the formatting of the resultant set of objects that are emitted at the end of
a pipeline
• Implement sequences of operations by putting them together into a script
• Implement flow control within scripts and define functions and filters to help
modularize complex scripts
• Manipulate files and registry values
• Manage disk storage volumes, shadow copies, shared folders, Terminal Services and
IIS properties using WMI in Windows PowerShell
• Administer and maintain Active Directory directory services and IIS 7.0 Web sites
using Windows PowerShell
• Maintain Group Policy using Windows PowerShell
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introduction to Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Audience:
The audience of this course is Windows SharePoint Server 3.0 administrators, who are
responsible for planning, deploying and managing Windows SharePoint Services 3.0
servers and sites in a Windows Server 2008 environment. Students taking this course
are expected to have experience administering Windows Server 2003 or Windows
Server 2008, and experience working with IIS 6.0 or IIS 7.0. Students are not expected to
have experience with Windows SharePoint Services.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Technical background knowledge and hands-on experience on implementing,
managing, and supporting Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or 2008, including
Internet Information Services (IIS)
• Working knowledge of Active Directory, TCP/IP, and Domain Name System (DNS)
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Explain the fundamentals of Windows SharePoint Service 30
• Plan and install Windows SharePoint Services 30
• Administer and manage Windows SharePoint Services servers
• Create and administer Windows SharePoint Services sites
• Work with Windows SharePoint Services 30
Durata:
2 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introduction to Windows SharePoint Services 3.0
Module 2: Planning and Installing Microsoft Windows SharePoint Services 3.0
Module 3: Administering and Managing Windows SharePoint Services Servers
Module 4: Administering Windows SharePoint Services 3.0 Sites
Module 5: Working with Windows SharePoint Services 3.0
Module 2: Overview of Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 3: Building Pipelines for Assembly-Line Style Processing
Module 4: Managing Processes and Formatting Cmdlet Output
Module 5: Introduction to Scripting with Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 6: Implementing Flow Control and Functions
Module 7: Working with Files, the Registry, and Certificate Stores
Module 8: Managing the Windows Operating System Using Microsoft Windows
PowerShell and WMI
Module 9: Administering Active Directory with Microsoft Windows PowerShell
Module 10: Administering Group Policy in Microsoft Windows PowerShell Using COM
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
190
Windows Server 2008
Windows Server 2008
Implementing and Managing Windows Server 2008 Clustering
Versione:
193
Planning and Implementing Windows Server 2008
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for IT professional technical specialists responsible for
implementing and maintaining high availability solutions utilizing clustering
technologies.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Experience with network load balancing
• Basic knowledge of clustering theory
• Experience in an enterprise environment managing applications and network
topologies
• Basic troubleshooting skills
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• implement, maintain, and troubleshoot clusters in their enterprise environment.
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Introduction to Clusters
Audience:
This five day course is intended for IT Professionals who are interested in the knowledge
and skills necessary to plan and implement a Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server
2008 R2 environment. It incorporates both the planning of the server infrastructure and
key aspects of the implementation, management and maintenance of Active Directory
and Network Infrastructure.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• At least one year experience in implementing or contributing to server and client
planning
• At least one year experience carrying out day to day network Infrastructure and
Active Directory management and maintenance tasks
• Technology skills equivalent to moc course 6418C: Deploying Windows Server 2008
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Sp1 deployments and
upgrades
• Plan server management and delegated administration strategies
• Plan for network addressing with IPv4 and IPv6 and also the provisioning of DNS
services
• Plan and provision Active Directory Domain Services
• Plan and implement Group Policy strategy
• Plan and implement Active Directory Certificate Services
• Plan and provision Application servers including Web services, presentation
virtualization and application virtualization
• Plan and implement file and print server roles
• Plan and implement secure network access policies such as VPNs, Network Access
Protection (NAP) and Direct Access
• Plan and provision data and storage
• Plan and implement an update management strategy using Windows Server Update
Services (WSUS)
• Plan and implement high availability
• Plan for server performance and event monitoring
• Plan and implement a backup and recovery strategy
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Planning Server Deployment and Upgrade
Module 2: Introduction to Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Failover Clusters
Module 3: Preparing to Install a Failover Cluster
Module 4: Overview of Failover Cluster Storage Requirements
Module 5: Configuring a Failover Cluster
Module 6: Configuring Cluster Resources and Server Roles
Module 7: Maintaining Microsoft Failover Clusters
Module 8: Implementing Geographically Dispersed Clusters
Module 9: Implementing Network Load Balanced Clusters
Module 2: Planning Server Management and Delegated Administration
Module 3: Planning Network Addressing and Name Resolution
Module 4: Planning and Provisioning Active Directory Domain Services
Module 5: Planning Group Policy Strategy
Module 6: Planning Active Directory Certificate Services
Module 7: Planning and Provisioning Application Servers
Module 8: Planning File and Print Services
Module 9: Planning Network Access
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
192
Windows Server 2012
194
195
Administering Windows Server 2012
Versione:
Module 11: Planning Update Deployment
Audience:
This course is intended for Information Technology (IT) Professionals with hands on
experience working in a Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2012 environment,
who wish to acquire the skills and knowledge necessary to be able to manage and
maintain the core infrastructure required for a Windows Server 2012 environment.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Real world hands on experience working with Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012
• Good knowledge and understanding of Active Directory and networking
infrastructure
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Deploy and Maintain Server Images
• Configure and Troubleshoot DNS
• Maintain Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS).
• Manage User and Service Accounts
• Implement a Group Policy Infrastructure
• Manage User Desktops with Group Policy
• Configure and Troubleshoot Remote Access
• Install, Configure and Troubleshoot Network Policy Server (NPS) role
• Implement Network Access Protection (NAP)
• Optimize File Services
• Configure Encryption and Advanced Auditing
• Implement Update Management
• Monitor Windows Server 2012
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Deploying and Maintaining Server Images
Module 12: Planning High Availability
Module 13: Planning Performance and Event Monitoring
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 14: Enterprise Backup and Recovery
Module 2: Configuring and Troubleshooting Domain Name System
Module 3: Maintaining Active Directory Domain Services
Module 4: Managing User and Service Accounts
Module 5: Implementing a Group Policy Infrastructure
Module 6: Managing User Desktops with Group Policy
Module 7: Configuring and Troubleshooting Remote Access
Module 8: Installing, Configuring, and Troubleshooting the Network Policy Server Role
Module 9: Implementing Network Access Protection
Module 10: Optimizing File Services
Module 11: Configuring Encryption and Advanced Auditing
Module 12: Implementing Update Management
Module 13: Monitoring Windows Server 2012
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 10: Provisioning Data and Storage
Windows Server 2012
Windows Server 2012
Configuring Advanced Windows Server 2012 Services
Versione:
Audience:
197
Designing and Implementing a Server Infrastructure
Versione:
This course is intended for IT professionals with hands-on experience implementing,
managing, and maintaining a Windows Server 2012 infrastructure in an existing
enterprise environment, who wish to acquire the skills and knowledge necessary to
perform advanced management and provisioning of services within that Windows
Server 2012 environment.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Good hands-on experience working in a Windows Server 2008, Windows server
2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 enterprise environment
• Real-world experience implementing, managing, and configuring AD DS and
networking infrastructure in an enterprise environment
• Knowledge equivalent to courses: 20410B: Installing and Configuring Windows
Server 2012, and 20411B: Administering Windows Server 2012
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Implement advanced network services
• Implement advanced file services
• Implement Dynamic Access Control
• Implement distributed Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) deployments
• Implement AD DS sites and replication
• Implement Active Directory Certification Services (AD CS)
• Implement Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS)
• Implement Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS)
• Implement network load balancing (NLB)
• Implement failover clustering
• Implement failover clustering with Hyper-V
• Implement disaster recovery
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Implementing Advanced Network Services
Audience:
Candidates for this course have good Windows client and server operating system
knowledge and basic AD DS and networking experience in an enterprise/small business
(SMB) environment together with application configuration experience.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• A good understanding of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
fundamentals and networking concepts
• A good working knowledge of both Windows Server 2012 and Active Directory
Domain Services (AD DS) For example, domain user accounts, domain vs local user
accounts, user profiles, and group membership
• A good understanding of both scripts and batch files
• A solid understanding of security concepts, such as authentication and authorization
• Familiarity with deployment, packaging, and imaging tools
• Ability to work in a team/virtual team
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Implement server upgrade and migration
• Design an automated server installation strategy
• Plan and implement a server deployment infrastructure
• Plan and implement file and storage services
• Design and implement a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) solution
• Design a name resolution solution strategy
• Design and manage an IP address management solution
• Design a VPN solution
• Design a DirectAccess solution
• Implement a scalable remote access solution
• Design a network protection solution
• Implement a network protection solution
• Design a forest and domain infrastructure
• Implement a forest and domain infrastructure
• Design a Group Policy strategy
• Design an Active Directory permission model
• Design an Active Directory sites topology
• Design a domain controller strategy
• Design and implement a branch office infrastructure
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Planning Server Upgrade and Migration
Module 2: Implementing Advanced File Services
Module 3: Implementing Dynamic Access Control
Module 4: Implementing Distributed Active Directory Domain Services Deployments
Module 5: Implementing Active Directory Domain Services Sites and Replication
Module 6: Implementing Active Directory Certificate Services
Module 7: Implementing Active Directory Rights Management Services
Module 8: Implementing Active Directory Federation Services
Module 2: Planning and Implementing a Server Deployment Infrastructure
Module 9: Implementing Network Load Balancing
Module 3: Designing and Maintaining an IP Configuration and Address Management
Solution
Module 10: Implementing Failover Clustering
Module 4: Designing and Implementing Name Resolution
Module 11: Implementing Failover Clustering with Hyper-V
Module 5: Designing and Implementing an Active Directory Domain Services Forest and
Domain Infrastructure
Module 12: Implementing Disaster Recovery
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
196
Windows Server 2012
198
199
Implementing a Desktop Infrastructure
Module 6: Designing and Implementing an OU Infrastructure and AD DS Permissions
Model
Module 7: Designing and Implementing a Group Policy Object Strategy
Versione:
The course is primarily intended for IT Professionals who manage the desktop
environments for organizations, and want to specialize in Windows 8 desktop
deployments. These IT professionals typically work in complex computing environments
of large to enterprise-sized organizations.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Solid understanding of TCP/IP and networking concepts
• Solid knowledge of Windows and Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS)—for
example, domain user accounts, domain vs. local user accounts, user profiles, and
group membership
• Good understanding of scripts and batch files
• Solid understanding of security concepts such as authentication and authorization
• Familiarity with the client administration capabilities of Windows Server
• General knowledge of management tools such as System Center 2012 Configuration
Manager, System Center 2012 Operations Manager, and System Center 2012 Data
Protection Manager.
• Familiarity with imaging, packaging, and operating system deployment concepts
• Familiarity with certificates and Certification Authority (CA) implementation and
configuration
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Assess and determine desktop deployment options
• Plan an image management strategy
• Implement desktop security
• Capture and manage a desktop operating system image
• Plan and implement User State Migration
• Plan and deploy desktops by using the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
• Plan and deploying desktops by using System Center 2012 Configuration Manager
• Plan and implement a Remote Desktop Services infrastructure
• Manage user state virtualization for enterprise desktops
• Plan and implement an updates infrastructure to support enterprise desktops
• Protect enterprise desktops from malware and data loss
• Monitoring the performance and health of the desktop infrastructure
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Assessing and Determining Desktop Deployment Options
Module 8: Designing and Implementing an AD DS Physical Topology
Module 9: Planning and Implementing Storage
Module 10: Planning and Implementing File Services
Module 11: Designing and Implementing Network Access Services
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 12: Designing and Implementing Network Protection
Module 2: Planning An Image Management Strategy
Module 3: Implementing Desktop Security
Module 4: Capturing and Managing a Desktop Operating System Image
Module 5: Planning and Implementing User State Migration
Module 6: Planning and Deploying Desktops Using the Microsoft Deployment Toolkit
Module 7: Planning and Deploying Desktops by Using System Center 2012 Configuration
Manager
Module 8: Planning and Implementing a Remote Desktop Services Infrastructure
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Audience:
Windows Server 2012
200
201
Implementing an Advanced Server Infrastructure
Versione:
Module 10: Planning and Implementing an Updates Infrastructure to Support Enterprise
Desktops
Audience:
This course is intended for Information Technology (IT) professionals who are
responsible for planning, designing and deploying a physical and logical Windows Server
2012 enterprise and Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) infrastructures including
the network services.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Understanding of TCP/IP and networking concepts.
• Understanding of Windows Server 2012 and AD DS, including planning, designing
and deploying.
• Understanding of scripts and batch files.
• Understanding of security concepts such as authentication and authorization.
• Understanding of deployment, packaging, and imaging tools.
• Working in a team or a virtual team.
• Creating proposals and making budget recommendation.
• Have achieved the Windows Server 2012 MCSA certification as well as information
in the course 20413A: Designing and Implementing an Enterprise Server
Infrastructure
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Plan and implement server virtualization strategy
• Plan and implement networks and storage for virtualization
• Plan and deploy virtual machines
• Manage a virtual machine deployment
• Plan and implement a server monitoring strategy
• Plan and implement high availability for file services and applications
• Plan and implement a highly available infrastructure using failover clustering
• Plan and implement an server updates infrastructure
• Plan and implement a business continuity strategy
• Plan and implement a public key infrastructure (PKI)
• Plan and implement an identity federation infrastructure
• Plan and Implement an information rights management infrastructure
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Planning and Implementing a Server Virtualization Strategy
Module 11: Protecting Enterprise Desktops from Malware and Data Loss
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 12: Monitoring the Performance and Health of the Desktop Infrastructure
Module 2: Planning and Implementing Networks and Storage for Virtualization
Module 3: Planning and Deploying Virtual Machines
Module 4: Planning and Implementing a Virtualization Administration Solution
Module 5: Planning and Implementing a Server Monitoring Strategy
Module 6: Planning and Implementing High Availability for File Services and Applications
Module 7: Planning and Implementing a Highly Available Infrastructure Using Failover
Clustering
Module 8: Planning and Implementing an Server Updates Infrastructure
Module 9: Planning and Implementing a Business Continuity Strategy
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 9: Managing User State Virtualization For Enterprise Desktops
Windows Server 2012
202
203
Implementing Desktop Application Environments
Versione:
Module 11: Planning and Implementing an Identity Federation Infrastructure
Audience:
This course is intended for IT Professionals who are interested in specializing in
Windows 8 application deployments and managing the application environments for
large organizations. People attending this training could be support technicians or
currently in deployment roles and are considering taking the next step in their career or
enhancing their skills in the areas of planning and deploying Windows 8 desktops.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Experience supporting Windows 8 client desktops and deploying and managing
applications, both physical and virtual
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Design an application distribution strategy that is appropriate for an organizational
environment
• Diagnose and remediate application compatibility problems for desktop and
presentation virtualization-based deployments
• Use Group Policy and Windows Intune to deploy applications to client devices
• Deploy applications centrally using Configuration Manager
• Configure self-service application deployment using Configuration Manager, Service
Manager, and Windows 8 Application Store
• Design and deploy Windows Server 2012 roles and features to support presentation
virtualization
• Prepare, deploy and manage applications for Remote Desktop, RemoteApp, and
Remote Desktop Web Access
• Design and deploy Windows Server 2012 roles and features to support application
virtualization
• Virtualize and deploy applications by using App-V and System Center 2012
Configuration Manager
• Plan and configure the appropriate infrastructure to streamline the deployment of
software updates to applications, and plan and configure application security
• Plan and implement application upgrades, supersedence, and application
coexistence
• Monitor the deployment, performance, and utilization of applications and
determine whether current application hosting platforms are meeting business
needs
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Designing an Application Distribution Strategy
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 12: Planning and Implementing an Information Rights Management
Infrastructure
Module 2: Diagnosing and Remediating Application Compatibility
Module 3: Deploying Applications by Using Group Policy and Windows Intune
Module 4: Deploying Applications by Using System Center Configuration Manager
Module 5: Configuring Self-Service Application Deployment
Module 6: Designing and Implementing Presentation Virtualization Infrastructure
Module 7: Preparing, Configuring and Deploying Presentation Virtualization Applications
Module 8: Designing and Deploying an Application Virtualization Environment
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 10: Planning and Implementing an Public Key Infrastructure
Windows Server 2012
204
205
Installing and Configuring Windows Server 2012
Versione:
Module 10: Planning and Implementing Application Updates and Security
Audience:
This course is intended for Information Technology (IT) Professionals who have good
Windows operating system knowledge and experience and want to acquire the skills
and knowledge necessary to implement the core infrastructure services in an existing
Windows Server 2012 environment.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• A good understanding of networking fundamentals
• An understanding of and experience with configuring security and administration
tasks in an enterprise environment
• Experience supporting or configuring Windows operating system clients
• Good hands-on Windows client operating system experience with Windows Vista,
Windows 7, or Windows 8
• An understanding of basic Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) concepts, such
as the purpose of user accounts and computer accounts
• Students would also benefit from having some previous Windows Server operating
system experience
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Install and Configure Windows Server 2012
• Describe AD DS
• Manage Active Directory objects
• Automate Active Directory administration
• Implement IPv4
• Implement Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
• Implement Domain Name System (DNS)
• Implement IPv6
• Implement local storage
• Share files and printers
• Implement Group Policy
• Use Group Policy Objects (GPOs) to secure Windows Servers
• Implement server virtualization using Hyper-V
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
Module 1: Deploying and Managing Windows Server 2012
Module 11: Planning and Implementing Application Upgrade and Supersedence
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 12: Monitoring Application Deployment, Utilization, and Performance
Module 2: Introduction to Active Directory Domain Services
Module 3: Managing Active Directory Domain Services Objects
Module 4: Automating Active Directory Domain Services Administration
Module 5: Implementing IPv4
Module 6: Implementing Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Module 7: Implementing Domain Name System
Module 8: Implementing IPv6
Module 9: Implementing Local Storage
Module 10: Implementing File and Print Services
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 9: Preparing, Sequencing, and Deploying Virtual Application
206
Module 11: Implementing Group Policy
Module 12: Securing Windows Servers Using Group Policy Objects
MICROSOFT IT PROFESSIONALS
Module 13: Implementing Server Virtualization with Hyper-V
AREA ICT - Microsoft IT Professionals
Access - intermedio
Access - base
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Audience:
Utenti mediamente esperti che desiderano approfondire la conoscenza di Microsoft
Access
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo e familiarità con Microsoft Access
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Aprire un database e navigare tra gli oggetti che lo compongono
• Creare una o più tabelle
• Gestire il formato dei dati nelle tabelle
• Formattare e stampare le tabelle
• Correlare le tabelle
• Creare semplici query di selezione
• Creare una semplice maschera di immissione dati
• Creare semplice report per la stampa delle informazioni
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare maschere interattive
• Inserire controlli per l’immissione corretta dei dati nelle maschere
• Creare report per un’efficace lettura dei dati
• Creare query di selezione avanzate
• Comprendere i diversi tipi di join
• Condividere i dati di Access con altre applicazioni
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Apertura di un database di esempio e comprensione degli oggetti che lo
compongono
• Creazione di una o più tabelle in modalità struttura
• Definizione e modifica del formato dei dati
• Impostazione della chiave primaria
• Inserimento dei dati dal foglio dati
• Formattare righe e colonne delle tabelle
• Stampa delle informazioni
• Relazionare le tabelle tramite la finestra delle relazioni
• Tipi di relazione
• L’integrità referenziale
•
•
•
•
Creare semplici query di selezione dei dati
I criteri nelle query
Visualizzazione del risultato di una query
Stampa del risultato della query
• Creazione di una maschera tramite creazione guidata
• Immissione dei dati in una tabella tramite una maschera
• Creazione di un report tramite creazione guidata
• Anteprima di stampa e stampa del report
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
209
Progettazione di una maschera di immissione dei dati
Maschere a colonne e maschere tabulari
Creazione di una maschera da struttura
Inserimento dei controlli
Formattazione dei controlli e dei dati
Inserimento dei dati
• Progettazione di una maschera di ricerca dei dati
• Inserimento di una sottomaschera
• Inserimento e ricerca dei dati in una maschera
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di query di selezione avanzate
Query parametriche
Query di selezione dati non corrispondenti
Tipi di join
Modifica del tipo join nella query
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un report da struttura
Strutturare le informazioni nel report
Raggruppamento dei dati
Formattazione di un report
Impostazione della stampa
•
•
•
•
•
Condivisione dei dati di Access con altre applicazioni
Importare dati in Access da Excel
Esportare in formato Excel
Importare ed esportare in formato testo
Unione dei dati di Access con un documento di Word
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
208
Access - avanzato
Excel - base
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti esperti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate di Microsoft Access
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza del sistema operativo e buona conoscenza di Microsoft Access
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare un nuovo database per importazione dei dati
• Relazionare le tabelle di un database
• Effettuare calcoli e riepiloghi in un database
• Creare query di comando
• Ottimizzare maschere e report
• Creare macro e associarle ad un pulsante
• Proteggere i dati di un database
• Ottimizzare un database per la distribuzione
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
2 giorni
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare semplici tabelle
• Inserire diversi tipologie di dati nelle tabelle
• Formattare i dati nelle tabelle
• Eseguire semplici calcoli
• Comprendere la differenza tra formule e funzioni
• Gestire più fogli di lavoro
• Formattare il foglio per la stampa
• Stampare le informazioni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un nuovo da database tramite importazione di dati da Excel
Strutturazione dei dati nelle tabelle
Relazionare le tabelle
Creazione di query per l’estrazione dei dati
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Modalità di calcolo in Access
Inserimento di campi calcolati
Raggruppare e calcolare tramite tabelle pivot
Inserimento di calcoli in un report
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di semplici tabelle
Inserimento dei dati in formato testo, numeri e date
Creazione di elenchi personalizzati
Aggiungere ed eliminare righe e colonne
Nascondere e scoprire righe e colonne
Annullare uno o più comandi
Salvataggio dei dati
•
•
•
•
•
•
Esecuzione di calcoli
Calcolare tramite l’utilizzo di formule
Calcolare utilizzando lo strumento di riempimento automatico
Calcolare utilizzando semplici funzioni
Le funzioni di base: somma, media, max, min, contavalori, contanumeri
Le funzioni di calcolo automatico
•
•
•
•
Gestione dei calcoli nel foglio di lavoro
Copiare e spostare le formule
Copiare i valori
Comprendere i riferimenti relativi e assoluti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Formattazione dei dati
Formattare i numeri
Formattare i testi
Formattare le date
Copiare il formato
Cancellare il formato
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione dei fogli in una cartella di lavoro
Inserire, rinominare ed eliminare un foglio di lavoro
Copiare e spostare un foglio di lavoro
Gestione integrata delle visualizzazioni in una cartella di lavoro
Lavorare con più cartelle di lavoro
• Le query di comando
• Query di creazione tabella, aggiornamento, eliminazione e accodamento
• Inserimento di controlli calcolati in una maschera
• Inserimento di controlli calcolati in un report
• Creazione di una macro
• Associare una macro ad un pulsante
• Inserimento di un pulsante interattivo in una maschera
• Proteggere un database tramite password
• Proteggere gli oggetti di un database
• Creazione di un pannello comandi per la distribuzione e la visualizzazione di un
database
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
211
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
210
Excel - intermedio
212
Stampare le informazioni di un foglio di lavoro
Lavorare con l’anteprima di stampa
Formattare la pagina di stampa
Inserire intestazioni e piè di pagina
Impostare un’ area di stampa
Procedere con la stampa dei dati
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti mediamente esperti che desiderano approfondire la conoscenza di Microsoft
Excel
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo e familiarità con Microsoft Excel
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Utilizzare funzioni di livello avanzato
• Formattare con le funzionalità automatiche di formattazione
• Creare e gestire grafici
• Modificare formato dei grafici
• Proteggere i dati nel foglio di lavoro
• Importare ed esportare informazioni di Excel in altri formati
• Gestire le opzioni di Excel
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inserire funzioni di livello avanzato
Funzioni Matematiche
Funzioni Testo
Funzione Data e Ora
Funzioni Statistiche
Funzioni Logiche
Funzione Informative
Funzioni Finanziarie
•
•
•
•
Formattare in modo coerente i dati
Formattazione automatica delle tabelle
Creazione di formati numerici personalizzati
La formattazione condizionale
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un grafico
Tipologie di grafici
Modifica dello stile e del layout di un grafico
Lavorare con le opzioni di un grafico
Stampare un grafico
•
•
•
•
•
Protezione dei dati
Proteggere un foglio di lavoro
Proteggere una cartella di lavoro
Proteggere un file
Protezione delle celle tramite convalida dei dati
•
•
•
•
Esportare i dati di Excel in altri formati
Esportare in formato Access
Esportare in formato testo
Importazione guidata di dati
• Personalizzazione dell’interfaccia di lavoro in Excel
• Barra multifunzione e barra di accesso rapido
• Le opzioni di Excel
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
•
•
•
•
•
•
213
Excel - avanzato
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti esperti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate di Microsoft Excel
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza del sistema operativo e buona conoscenza di Microsoft Excel
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Integrare fogli e cartelle di lavoro tramite il consolidamento dei dati
• Gestire elenchi di dati
• Ordinare e filtrare i dati
• Creare subtotali
• Inserire funzioni di ricerca e riferimento
• Inserire funzioni database
• Utilizzare MS Query per la gestione integrata dei dati
• Creare e utilizzare le strutture
• Creare, gestire e modificare le tabelle pivot
• Revisionare una cartella di lavoro
• Utilizzare gli strumenti di analisi e simulazione
• Registraree gestire semplici macro
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Inserire formule e funzioni tra fogli diversi
Inserire formule e funzioni tra cartelle di lavoro diverse
Consolidamento dei dati
Creazione e utilizzo di una struttura di riepilogo dei dati
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestire un database in Excel
Ordinamenti semplici e avanzati
Filtri automatici e avanzati
Creazioni di subtotali calcolati
Creazione di subtotali automatici
Uso della formattazione condizionale per l’analisi dei dati
Le funzioni “cerca verticale” e “cerca orizzontale”
Funzioni di ricerca nidificate
Le funzioni database
•
•
•
•
Utilizzo di MS Query per l’analisi integrata di dati su tabelle diverse
Importazione dei dati in MS Query
Correlazione delle tabelle
Estrazione dei dati in Excel
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione e gestione delle tabelle pivot
Modifica di una tabella pivot
Inserimento di calcoli e raggruppamenti personalizzati
Stampa e formattazione delle tabelle pivot
Grafici pivot
•
•
•
•
Strumenti di revisione di una cartella di lavoro
Inserire commenti
Revisionare un documento
Unire le modifiche
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
215
•
•
•
•
•
Le analisi di simulazione
Gli scenari
Le tabelle dati
Ricerca obiettivo
Grafici sparkline
•
•
•
•
Le macro
Registrare semplici macro
Macro assolute e macro relative
Associare una macro ad un pulsante
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
214
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
Office 365 - Novità 2013
217
A day in the life of the End-User
Versione:
Audience:
This course is intended for information workers who have used Microsoft Office and
basic navigation skills. This course is also intended to provide Technology-Influencing
Business Decision Makers (TIBDM) in need of gaining an understanding of how Office
365 can increase employee productivity, share information easily and complete tasks
faster.
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, students must have:
• Basic Microsoft Office knowledge
• Basic Windows Navigation
Obiettivi
formativi:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Gain an understanding of how Office 365 can make them productive with Outlook,
Lync and SharePoint integrated
• Access and work with mail using Outlook Web Access (OWA)
• Work with new features available using Exchange 2010 with Outlook 2010
• Contact a Co-Worker from within Outlook using Lync
• Collaborate with people inside and outside the company using Lync
• Collaborate with others through SharePoint
• Work with a Team Site and view information within Outlook
• Update a document using SharePoint Web Apps
Durata:
1 days
Contenuti
• Module 1: Understanding Office 365
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
216
• Module 2: Accessing Office 365 Remotely
• Module 3: Working with Outlook Web Access (OWA)
• Module 4: Using New Features in Outlook 2010
• Module 5: Using Lync to Collaborate with Others
• Module 6: Using SharePoint to locate and Share Information
• Module 7: Using Web Apps with Documents
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
Outlook - base
Outlook - avanzato
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano progredire e diventare autonomi nell’uso di Microsoft Outlook
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano acquisire piena autonomia con Microsoft Outlook
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza del sistema operativo e familiarità con Microsoft Outlook
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Muoversi autonomamente nell’interfaccia dell’applicazione
• Inviare e ricevere messaggi
• Rispondere inoltrare messaggi
• Gestire in modo autonomo i formati per i messaggi di posta
• Gestire gli allegati
• Gestire i contatti
• Lavorare con il calendario i suoi oggetti
• Lavorare con le attività e le note
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Personalizzare l’interfaccia dell’applicazione
• Gestire le opzioni avanzate dei messaggi
• Utilizzare in modo efficace regole di posta e fuori sede
• Visualizzare in modo efficace la posta
• Personalizzare l’utilizzo del calendario
• Cercare i dati in Outlook
• Archiviare i messaggi di posta
• Gestire le deleghe
Durata:
1 giorno
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
L’interfaccia di Outlook
Creazione di un nuovo messaggio
Opzioni di invio del messaggio
Formato del messaggio
Priorità e contrassegni
Formattazione del testo
Gestione degli allegati
Stampa dei messaggi
Archiviare messaggi nelle cartelle
Contenuti
• Ottimizzare l’interfaccia di Outlook
• Configurare più account di posta
• Scelta della posizione di ricezione dei messaggi
•
•
•
•
•
Pianificare il proprio tempo con il calendario di Outlook
Appuntamenti, eventi e riunioni
Le opzioni del calendario
Visualizzazioni del calendario
Stampa del calendario
• I contatti di Outlook
• Salvataggio e gestione dei contatti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Le attività di Outlook
Creare un’attività per se stessi
Assegnare attività ad altri
Creare e modificare le note
Utilizzare le note con gli altri componenti di Outlook
Modificare la visualizzazione delle note e stamparle
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
•
•
•
•
Opzioni avanzate di invio dei messaggi
Contrassegni, promemoria e scadenze
Priorità, riservatezza e categorizzazione dei messaggi
Le opzioni di verifica della posta
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di viste e raggruppamenti per i messaggi di posta
Filtrare e ordinare i messaggi
La posta indesiderata
Regole per l’archiviazione automatica dei messaggi
Impostazione e gestione del fuori sede
•
•
•
•
•
Personalizzazione del calendario
Tipi di visualizzazione per il calendario
Orario lavorativo, festività e fusi orari
La disponibilità del calendario
Condivisione del calendario
• I delegati e la loro gestione
• Archiviazione degli elementi di Outlook
• Archiviazione automatica e manuale
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
219
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
218
PowerPoint - base
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a coloro che gestiscono con Outlook un elevato numero di
messaggi e attraverso il calendario gestiscono i propri impegni e/o quelli degli altri Il
corso è finalizzato a fornire i migliori strumenti per diventare padroni del proprio tempo
e delle attività
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare ex novo una presentazione
• Inserire testi e oggetti grafici
• Formattare coerentemente testi e oggetti grafici
• Inserire tabelle e grafici
• Formattare coerentemente tabelle e grafici
• Predisporre una presentazione per l’esecuzione
• Inserire transizioni e semplici animazioni
• Predisporre note e stampati
• Stampare la presentazione
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di una nuova presentazione
Inserimento di caselle di testo
Formattazione del testo e delle caselle
Inserimento di elenchi puntati
Strutturare gli elenchi puntati
Inserimento di immagini
Ritocco delle immagini
Disegnare forme
Formattazione delle forme
Allineare e distribuire gli elementi di una presentazione
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le tabelle
Inserire una tabella ex novo
Formattare le tabelle
Importare una tabella da excel
Modalità di importazione
Inserire grafici
Importare e collegare grafici di Excel
•
•
•
•
•
Esecuzione di una presentazione
Scelta delle transizioni
Creare una semplice animazione degli oggetti
Lavorare con la vista visualizzazione diapositive
Eseguire una presentazione
•
•
•
•
•
Predisposizione di note e stampati
Stampare la pagina note
Stampare gli stampati
Impostazione di intestazioni e piè di pagina
Stampa della presentazione
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza di MS Outlook
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Gestire un sistema integrato di posta
• Pianificare le proprie attività e il proprio tempo
• Ottimizzare la lettura, la lavorazione e l’archiviazione della posta
• Gestire efficacemente il proprio tempo attraverso l’utilizzo del calendario
• Gestire efficacemente il calendario di altri utenti
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Un nuovo approccio alla gestione del tempo per migliorare la produttività personale
Strategie ed equilibri per un nuovo sistema integrato di posta
Modalità per la raccolta delle informazioni
Cartelle di posta e cartelle documenti
• Redazione di un messaggio di posta attraverso il modello SASO
• Lettura dei messaggi
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modalità per una gestione di efficace dei messaggi di posta
Contrassegnare i messaggi
Priorità e riservatezza
I pulsanti di voto
Verifica e richiamo dei messaggi
Opzioni di recapito dei messaggi
Inserire la firma
Le regole fuori sede
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Archiviazione dei messaggi
Visualizzazioni e raggruppamenti
Filtri e ordinamenti
Categorizzare i messaggi
Regole di archiviazione dei messaggi
Archiviazione automatica e temporizzata
Ricerca dei messaggi
• Condivisione della posta
• Gestione dei delegati
• Il calendario e i suoi elementi
• Opzioni avanzate del calendario
• Condivisione del calendario
• Pianificare il proprio lavoro con le attività
• Pianificare e controllare il lavoro degli altri attraverso le attività
• Le note come promemoria
• Uso del diario per tenere traccia del lavoro svolto
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
221
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
220
Outlook - Gestione efficace della posta e del
tempo
PowerPoint - avanzato
PowerPoint - Presentazioni ad alto impatto
223
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti esperti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate di Microsoft PowerPoint
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza del sistema operativo e familiarità con Microsoft PowerPoint
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare o modificare una presentazione partendo dallo schema diapositiva
• Modificare uno schema di positiva
• Inserire diagrammi e schemi
• Inserire grafici collegati
• Inserire pulsanti interattivi per la navigazione
• Creare animazioni complesse
• Lavorare con le presentazioni personalizzate
• Proteggere e distribuire una presentazione
Utenti in possesso di una buona conoscenza di Microsoft PowerPoint che vogliono
progredire per creare slide graficamente migliori
e acquisire maggiore padronanza nella conduzione della presentazione
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza delle principali applicazioni di Microsoft Office
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Redigere in modo coerente i contenuti di una presentazione
• Creare presentazioni graficamente più efficaci
• Padroneggiare maggiormente lo strumento MS PowerPoint in fase di esecuzione di
una presentazione
• Condurre in modo più sicuro una presentazione
Durata:
1 giorno
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un modello di presentazione
Creare una o più diapositive master
Lavorare con il layout della diapositiva
Creare e salvare un tema personalizzato
Inserire intestazione e piè di pagina
Comprendere lo schema note e lo schema stampati
• Aggiungere diagrammi e SmartArt ad una presentazione
• Modifica di diagrammi e SmartArt
• Inserire suoni e filmati
• Aggiungere effetti speciali di animazione agli oggetti di una presentazione
• Inserire pulsanti di navigazione e spostamento
•
•
•
•
Ottimizzare una presentazione
Creazione di una presentazione personalizzata
Distribuire una presentazione
Proteggere una presentazione
Le caratteristiche di una presentazione
Il processo creativo di presentazione
La raccolta dei dati e l’obiettivo della presentazione
L’analisi dell’audience
• Definizione dello Schema della presentazione
• Schema e layout
• Scelta di stili e colori
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tipologie di presentazione
Scrivere il testo
Strutturare la presentazione in capitoli
Suddivisione dei contenuti in tabelle, grafici, disegni e organigrammi
Gestione delle forme
I collegamenti esterni
•
•
•
•
•
Esecuzione della presentazione
Inserimento coordinato di transizioni, animazioni e suoni
La gestione degli intervalli
Le presentazioni personalizzate
Collegamenti e pulsanti di azione
• Comunicare i contenuti della presentazioni
• La gestione della platea
• Gestire le domande del pubblico
• A richiesta esercitazioni su materiale del cliente
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
222
Project - base
Project - intermedio
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano iniziare a gestire un progetto con Microsoft Project
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano migliorare la gestione e il controllo di progetti avanzati
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza delle principali applicazioni di Microsoft Office
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base di Microsoft Project
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e modificare un progetto
• Creare le attività e definire le relazioni tra di esse
• Inserire le risorse
• Associare le attività alle risorse
• Formattare il progetto e stamparlo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Verificare l’esecuzione di un progetto
• Utilizzare viste, filtri e raggruppamenti per controllare un progetto
• Gestire il percorso critico di un progetto
• Gestire i costi delle risorse
• Stampare le visualizzazioni di un progetto e le relazioni
Durata:
1 giorno
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Comprensione dell’interfaccia di Microsoft Project
• Navigare tra le viste di un piano di progetto esistente
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Ordinamenti, filtri e raggruppamenti personalizzati
Visualizzazioni avanzate
La visualizzazione Pianificazione Team
Il diagramma reticolare
•
•
•
•
Verificare le attività
Disattivare le attività
Modificare il metodo di programmazione
Modificare le assegnazioni
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creare un progetto
Definire le proprietà di un progetto
Inserire le attività
Relazionare le attività
Definire le proprietà per le attività
Strutturare le attività
Attività di riepilogo e attività cardine
Programmazione manuale e programmazione automatica (solo Project 2010 e 2013)
•
•
•
•
Inserire le risorse
Definire le proprietà per le risorse
Inserire i costi per le risorse
Calendario delle attività e il calendario delle risorse
•
•
•
•
Salvataggio del piano di progetto
Le visualizzazioni di un piano di progetto
Formattazione di un piano di progetto
Stampare un progetto
• Lavorare con i costi
• Tipologie di tabelle costi
• Raggruppare i tipi di costi
•
•
•
•
Aggiornamento di progetto
Visualizzare il percorso critico di un progetto
Divisione di un’attività
Riprogrammare un’attività
• Completare un piano di progetto
• Accorciare la durata del progetto
• Livellare le risorse
• Stampare un report riassuntivo per il piano di progetto
• Creare un nuovo report
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
225
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
224
Project - avanzato
Publisher
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano imparare a gestire in modo completo e autonomo progetti
avanzati con Microsoft Project
Audience:
utenti che desiderano creare e gestire documenti graficamente complessi di taglio
editoriale avanzato
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza di Microsoft Project
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo e buona padronanza di Microsoft Word
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e gestire campi personalizzati
• Gestire i pool di risorse
• Creare relazioni custom
• Collegare tra loro più progetti
• Condividere Microsoft Project con altre applicazioni
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Progettare una pubblicazione graficamente accattivante con Publisher
• Lavorare con le pagine mastro per un layout coerente della pubblicazione
• Inserire e formattare il testo all’interno delle cornici
• Inserire e formattare cornici grafiche
• Inserire e formattare tabelle
• Preparare il documento per la stampa
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Ordinamenti, filtri e raggruppamenti personalizzati
Visualizzazioni avanzate
La visualizzazione Pianificazione Team
Il diagramma reticolare
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Verificare le attività
Disattivare le attività
Modificare il metodo di programmazione
Modificare le assegnazioni
•
•
•
•
Creazione di una nuova pubblicazione
Creazione e gestione delle pagine mastro
Inserimento degli elementi fissi nelle pagine mastro
Intestazione e piè di pagina
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inserimento di nuove pagine
Aggiunta e collegamento di caselle di testo
Formattazione del testo e gestione degli stili
Inserimento di immagini e disegni
Formattazione di immagini e disegni
Inserimento di un sommario
•
•
•
•
Inserimento e formattazione delle tabelle
Impostazioni di salvataggio
Formati di salvataggio per la distribuzione
Impostazioni di stampa
• Lavorare con i costi
• Tipologie di tabelle costi
• Raggruppare i tipi di costi
•
•
•
•
Aggiornamento di progetto
Visualizzare il percorso critico di un progetto
Divisione di un’attività
Riprogrammare un’attività
• Completare un piano di progetto
• Accorciare la durata del progetto
• Livellare le risorse
• Stampare un report riassuntivo per il piano di progetto
• Creare un nuovo report
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
227
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
226
Visio
Word - base
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a colore che devono creare diagrammi complessi, flussi di
processi lunghi e articolati e necessitano quindi di un’applicazione completa e flessibile
come Microsoft Visio
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza delle principali applicazioni di Microsoft Office
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e gestire forme e diagrammi
• Scegliere coerentemente tra diverse tipologie di forme e diagrammi
• Creare modelli di diagrammi
• Stampare e distribuire i diagrammi
• Integrare le forme di Microsoft Visio con un base di dati
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
2 giorni
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e salvare un nuovo documento
• Inserire modificare il testo
• Formattare testo e paragrafi
• Applicare correzioni ortografiche e linguistiche al documento
• Inserire semplici oggetti grafici come immagini e disegni
• Formattare le pagine del documento
• Stampare il documento
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione a Microsoft Visio
Creare forme di base
Connettere le forme
Inserire testo nelle forme
Formattare con stili, motivi e colori
Lavorare con gli stencil
Creare ed utilizzare i modelli di diagrammi
Salvare, stampare e distribuire i diagrammi
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Costruire diagrammi aziendali
Creare diagrammi di flusso di processi
Creare organigrammi
Inserire i dati negli elementi dell’organigramma
Esportare i dati dell’organigramma
Creare diagrammi a blocchi
Creare diagrammi per scale cronologiche
Esportare diagrammi di Visio in PowerPoint
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tipologie di diagrammi in Visio
Creare diagrammi di rete
Inserire i dati negli oggetti di un diagramma
Formati di esportazione dei dati
Creare mappe per siti web
Diagrammi per database e software
Diagrammi tecnici
Esempi di piante di spazi e di esterni
Creazione e modifica di nuovo documento
Scegliere la vista migliore per lavorare al documento
Inserire testo
Selezionare il testo
Modificare il testo
Trovare e sostituire un testo
Salvare il documento scegliendo tra i formati disponibili
• Formattazione del carattere
• Formattazione del paragrafo
•
•
•
•
•
Correzione ortografica e grammaticale del documento
Modificare la lingua di correzione
Il thesaurus
Correzioni automatiche e voci di glossario
Le parti rapide
• Inserimento di un’immagine
• Inserimento di una forma
• Inserimento di simboli
• Formattazione delle pagine
• Inserimento di intestazione e piè di pagina
• Stampa del documento
• Integrare Visio con la gestione dei dati
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
229
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
228
Word - intermedio
Word - avanzato
231
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti mediamente esperti che desiderano approfondire la conoscenza di Microsoft
Word
Audience:
Utenti esperti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate di Microsoft Word
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo e familiarità con Microsoft Word
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza del sistema operativo e buone conoscenze di Microsoft Word
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e gestire elenchi di testo strutturati e nidificati
• Creare e modificare le tabelle in Word
• Formattare le tabelle
• Inserire grafici immagini e disegni
• Formattare in modalità avanzata caratteri e paragrafi
• Formattazione avanzata delle pagine
• Utilizzare la stampa unione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Formattare un documento utilizzando gli stili
• Creare un sommario utilizzando gli stili
• Creare ed utilizzare segnalibri, riferimenti e note, didascalie
• Aggiungere collegamenti ipertestuali, riferimenti incrociati, citazioni e bibliografie
• Migliorare la stesura e la lettura di documenti lunghi
• Condividere un documento di Word con altre applicazioni
• Collaborare con altri utenti alla realizzazione di un documento
• Applicare una protezione documento
• Creare ed utilizzare le macro per automatizzare l’operatività
Contenuti
• Creazioni di elenchi puntati e numerati strutturati
• Nidificazione degli elenchi
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inserimento di tabelle
Formattazione delle tabelle
Inserimento dei grafici
Formattazione dei grafici
Formazione avanzata di immagini e disegni
•
•
•
•
Formattazione avanzata dei caratteri e dei paragrafi
La distribuzione del testo
Lavorare con le sezioni
Applicare un formato pagina ad una sezione
•
•
•
•
Il procedimento della stampa unione
Creazione del documento principale
Identificazione dell’origine dei dati
Unione in nuovo documento
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
Creazione di uno stile
Applicazione di uno stile al carattere o al paragrafo
Modifica di uno stile
Salvare lo stile in un modello
• Creazione di un sommario tramite l’applicazione degli stili
• Formattazione di un sommario
• Automatizzare un documento attraverso l’inserimento di segnalibri, riferimenti
incrociati, note a piè di pagina e di chiusura, didascalie, collegamenti ipertestuali,
bibliografie, citazioni e indici
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione dei documenti lunghi
Utilizzo della visualizzazione struttura
Creazione di un documento master
Inserire l’indice delle figure
Inserire un frontespizio
Lavorare con la mappa del documento
•
•
•
•
•
Condividere Word con altre applicazioni
Inserire una tabella e un grafico di Excel
Inserire le slide di una presentazione
Inviare un documento a PowerPoint
Inviare un documento come allegato di posta elettronica
•
•
•
•
•
Metodi per la stesura condivisa di un documento
Modificare le informazioni personali relative al documento
Il processo di revisione di un documento
Confrontare due documenti
Lavorare e gestire le versioni dei documenti
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
230
232
•
•
•
•
•
Modalità di protezione di un documento in Word
Impostazione di una password di scrittura e di lettura
Redazione dei moduli
Inserimento dei dati nei moduli
Protezione dei moduli
MICROSOFT per UTENTI
• Creazione di macro per automatizzare l’operatività in Word
AREA ICT - Microsoft per utenti
Sviluppo applicazioni per Android
Versione:
Audience:
Il corso è rivolto a professionisti che desiderano sviluppare applicazioni basate sul
sistema operativo per dispositivi mobili Android
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base della programmazione ad oggetti, conoscenza di base del linguaggio
Java e Linux
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Comprendere i vari componenti di cui è formata un’applicazione Android
• Strutturare lo sviluppo di un applicazione con Android
• Sviluppare un applicazione
• Pubblicare e gestire il processo di pubblicazione su Android Market
Durata:
4 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione al sistema operativo Android
Storia di Android
Panoramica dei concetti di programmazione Object Oriented e Java
Compatibilità delle API
Configurazioni dell'hardware
Android App e Web App
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione degli emulatori
i principali strumenti di emulazione
Sviluppo App per Smart Phone
Sviluppo App per Tablet PC
Gestione degli schermi e delle dimensioni
•
•
•
•
•
SDK di Android
Installazione e creazione progetto Android
Interfaccia Java
Framework di Android (SDK e ADT)
IDE Eclipse
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sviluppo di applicazioni Android
Sviluppo di una prima applicazione
Strutturare il progetto Android in Eclipse
Gestione delle Activity
Sviluppare Features
Introduzione ai Layout, ListView e Adapter
Principi di SQlLite
Gestione di file
Gestione di un DB SQLite
Sincronizzazione e utilizzo dei Content Provider
Uso dei servizi REST
•
•
•
•
Introduzione ai Servizi
Schedulazione dei Task
Notification Service
Servizi locali e remoti
AREA ICT - Mobile
235
•
•
•
•
Pubblicazione dell'APP
Gestione della firma e delle versioni
Pubblicazione su Android Market
Gestione delle attività sul Market
MOBILE
MOBILE
234
AREA ICT - Mobile
MOBILE
236
Sviluppo applicazioni per IPhone e IPad
Versione:
Audience:
Questo corso è indirizzato a chi intenda acquisire le conoscenze necessarie per creare
applicazioni per iPhone, approfondendo l’ambiente di sviluppo xCode
Il corso prevede la creazione di un’applicazione vera e propria a supporto di una
formazione efficace, utile e creativa
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del linguaggio Objective-C
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Generare applicazioni iOS basate su xCode
Durata:
4 giorni
Contenuti
• Introduzione al mondo dello sviluppo delle applicazioni mobili
• L'iPhone e L’Ipad: panoramica della piattaforma tecnologica
• Panoramica sul mondo delle applicazioni mobili
• Principi della programmazione ad oggetti
• La Programmazione in Xcode
• L’interfaccia di sviluppo in Xcode
•
•
•
•
•
Compilazione di un'applicazione
Esecuzione dell'applicazione su simulatore e dispositivi di tipo iOS
Tipologia di dati in Xcode
Creazione e gestione di classi e oggetti
Allocazione e utilizzo di Number, Array, Dictionary e Set
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controllers e Views
I controlli di base dell’UI (User Interface)
UIView Controller
UINavigation Controller
UIImage View
Inserimento di barre di navigazione e di pulsanti
Gestione della navigazione per pagine
• Creazione e uso delle Table Views
• Caratteristiche di una Table View
• Visualizzazione di Menù tramite Table Views
•
•
•
•
•
Funzioni multimediali
Gestione Audio e Video
Utilizzo della videocamera per scattare foto e realizzare video
Organizzare foto e video
Modificare foto e video
• Distribuzione dell'applicazione tramite AppStore
AREA ICT - Mobile
Desktop Publishing con Scribus
Gimp - grafica bitmap
239
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Questo corso è rivolto a chi voglia acquisire oppure consolidare le operatività di base in
Scribus
Audience:
Questo corso è rivolto a chi voglia acquisire oppure consolidare le operatività di base in
Gimp
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Progettare un documento per l’editoria
• Inserire e modificare testo e immagini
• Distribuirlo in un formato di pubblicazione adeguato
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione a Scribus
Il pannello delle proprietà
Inserimento di immagini
Importare file di immagini
Importare file di testo
Applicare il colore – I riempimenti
Applicare il colore – Le sfumature
Creare un nuovo colore
Gestione del testo
L’editor di testo
Stili di testo
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Analizzare un’immagine e decidere l’operatività migliore per la sua modifica
• Lavorare con gli strumenti di selezione
• Lavorare in modo autonomo con i livelli
• Applicare il colore o correggerlo
• Esportare il lavoro per la stampa o l’integrazione in altre applicazioni
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione a Gimp
Caratteristiche di Gimp
Concetti generali grafica
L’interfaccia di Gimp
Elementi della finestra principale
Il pannello degli strumenti
La finestra immagine
Pannelli e schede
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Progettazione, modifica e stampa di un nuovo documento
Creazione delle pagine mastro
Inserire il numero di pagina
Applicazione di un layout ad una pagina
Testo in colonne
Testo in cornici separate
Combinazione di testo e immagini
Disegnare oggetti vettoriali
Testo e forme
Disegnare tracciati
Testo su tracciato
Inserimento e gestione di tabelle
Lavorare con i livelli
Navigare tra pagine e livelli
Lo schema del documento
La biblioteca
Formati dei file ed esportazione del contenuto
Scribus e il formato PDF
Operazioni preliminari alla stampa
Anteprima di stampa e stampa
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Operatività di base con Gimp
Gli strumenti di selezione
Scontornare un ‘immagine
Cambiare le dimensioni di una immagine per lo schermo
Cambiare le dimensioni di una immagine per la stampa
Ritagliare un’immagine
Modificare la modalità del colore di un’immagine
Ruotare un’immagine
Riflettere un ‘immagine
Proprietà dell’immagine
AREA ICT - OpenSource
• Lavorare con i livelli in Gimp
• Proprietà dei livelli
• Creazione di nuovi livelli
• Strumenti e tecniche di disegno in Gimp
• Disegnare forme semplici
• Disegnare con gli strumenti di pittura
•
•
•
•
•
Colorare in GIMP
Colorare con gli strumenti di pittura
Selezionare un colore
Applicare una sfumatura
Cancellare un colore
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
238
OpenOffice Calc - base
240
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fotoritocco
Comandi automatici di regolazione del colore
Comandi manuali di regolazione del colore
Lavorare con il testo in Gimp
Inserimento del testo
Modifica del testo
AREA ICT - OpenSource
a scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Gestire le cartelle di lavoro di Calc
• Inserire e gestire i dati in un foglio di lavoro
• Eseguire i calcoli sui dati contenuti nel foglio di lavoro
• Modificare il formato dei dati nel foglio di lavoro
• Lavorare con la vista pagina e l’anteprima di stampa
• Stampare il documento
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Aprire un foglio di calcolo esistente
Lavorare con i fogli e le cartelle
Creare un nuovo foglio di calcolo
Navigare nel foglio di lavoro e nella cartella
Salvare e chiudere una cartella
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inserimento dei dati
Selezionare celle ed intervalli
Inserire e modificare i dati nelle celle
Utilizzare le funzioni automatiche di calcolo
Cancellare le informazioni inserite
Copiare e spostare intervalli di celle
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Eseguire i calcoli nel foglio di lavoro
Formule e funzioni
Uso dei nomi nei calcoli
Calcolo automatico
Procedure guidate per il calcolo
Modificare ed eliminare i calcoli inseriti
Formule relative e assolute
•
•
•
•
Modificare il formato del testo e dei numeri
Modificare il formato di colonne e righe
Utilizzare la Formattazione Automatica
Copiare ed eliminare i formati
•
•
•
•
•
Formati di stampa
Anteprima di stampa
Intestazioni e piè di pagina
Impostare l’area di stampa
Stampare
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
• Salvataggio ed esportazione delle immagini in GIMP
• Formati di salvataggio delle immagini
Versione:
241
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OpenOffice Calc - intermedio
OpenOffice Calc - avanzato
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Utenti mediamente esperti che desiderano approfondire la conoscenza di OpenOffice
Calc
Audience:
Utenti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate sull’uso di OpenOffice Calc
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base di OpenOffice Calc
Prerequisiti:
Buona conoscenza di OpenOffice Calc
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e modificare grafici con OpenOffice Calc
• Modificare il formato del grafico
• Utilizzare la formattazione condizionata nelle celle
• Creare riepiloghi di dati strutturati
• Salvare il foglio di calcolo in formato per il Web
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Creare grafici con OpenOffice Calc
• Tipi di grafico
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Ordinare i dati
• Filtrare i dati
• Creare subtotali
• Consolidare i dati tra intervalli diversi
• Utilizzare funzione di ricerca e database
• Creare e gestire tabelle pivot
• Proteggere i fogli e le cartelle di lavoro
• Importare ed esportare le informazioni
• Registrare macro per automatizzare operazioni ripetitive
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Incorporare un grafico in un foglio di lavoro
• Anteprima e stampa del grafico
• Modificare il formato dei grafici
• Lavorare con gli elementi di un grafico
• Aggiungere indicatori statistici
• Formattazione automatica delle celle
• Formattazione condizionale delle celle
• Creare e lavorare con le strutture automatiche dei dati
• Inserire collegamenti ipertestuali
• Salvare il foglio di calcolo in formato web
Regole per la creazione e la gestione di elenchi di dati
Convalida dei dati
Ordinamenti semplici e avanzati
Filtro automatico e filtro avanzato
Subtotali per ordinamento
Subtotali su filtri
• Funzioni avanzate per la gestione dei dati
• Funzioni di ricerca dei dati
• Funzioni database di riepilogo dei dati
•
•
•
•
Creazione di tabelle pivot
Gestione dei dati nelle tabelle pivot
Inserimento di calcoli nelle tabelle pivot
Raggruppamento e ordinamento dei dati nelle tabelle pivot
• Consolidare i dati tra fogli diversi
• Consolidare i dati tra cartelle di lavoro diverse
•
•
•
•
Protezione dei dati
Proteggere un foglio di lavoro
Proteggere una cartella di lavoro
Proteggere le cartelle del foglio
• Importare ed esportare i dati
• Inserire immagini e altri oggetti
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - OpenSource
243
Integrazione di Calc con Writer e Impress
Creare ed utilizzare le macro
Registrare una semplice macro
Eseguire, modificare ed eliminare macro esistenti
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
242
OpenOffice DataBase - base
OpenOffice DataBase - avanzato
245
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Versione:
2003, 2007, 2010, 2013
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Audience:
Utenti mediamente esperti che desiderano approfondire la conoscenza di OpenOffice
DataBase
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo e familiarità con OpenOffice DataBase
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Aprire un database e navigare tra gli oggetti che lo compongono
• Creare una o più tabelle
• Gestire il formato dei dati nelle tabelle
• Formattare e stampare le tabelle
• Correlare le tabelle
• Creare semplici ricerche di dati
• Creare un semplice formulario per l’immissione dati
• Creare un semplice rapporto per la stampa delle informazioni
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare formulari interattivi
• Inserire controlli per l’immissione corretta dei dati nelle maschere
• Creare rapporti per un’efficace lettura dei dati
• Creare avanzate ricerche di dati
• Condividere i dati di DataBase con altre applicazioni
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Progettazione di una maschera o formulario di immissione dei dati
Creazione di una maschera da struttura
Inserimento dei controlli
Formattazione dei controlli e dei dati
Inserimento dei dati
Progettazione di un formulario di ricerca dei dati
Inserimento e ricerca dei dati in un formulario
•
•
•
•
Ricerche avanzate di dati
Ricerche parametriche
Eseguire modifiche dei dati con le ricerche di dati
Tipi di join
•
•
•
•
•
Creazione di un rapporto da struttura
Strutturare le informazioni nel rapporto
Raggruppamento dei dati
Formattazione di un rapporto
Impostazione della stampa
•
•
•
•
Condivisione dei dati di DataBase con altre applicazioni
Importare dati in DataBase da Calc
Esportare in formato foglio di calcolo
Importare ed esportare in formato testo
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Apertura di un database di esempio e comprensione degli oggetti che lo
compongono
• Creazione di una o più tabelle in modalità struttura
• Definizione e modifica del formato dei dati
• Impostazione della chiave primaria
• Inserimento dei dati dal foglio dati
• Formattare righe e colonne delle tabelle
• Stampa delle informazioni
• Relazionare le tabelle
• Tipi di relazione
•
•
•
•
Creare semplici ricerche per la selezione dei dati
Criteri di selezione dei dati per le ricerche
Visualizzazione del risultato di una ricerca
Stampa del risultato delle ricerche di dati
• Creazione di un formulario o maschera tramite creazione guidata
• Immissione dei dati in una tabella tramite un formulario
• Creazione di un rapporto o report tramite creazione guidata
• Anteprima di stampa e stampa del rapporto
AREA ICT - OpenSource
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
244
OpenOffice Impress - base
OpenOffice Impress - avanzato
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Audience:
Utenti esperti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate di OpenOffice Impress
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con il sistema operativo e conoscenza di OpenOffice Impress
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Aprire ed eseguire una presentazione esistente
• Creare una nuova presentazione
• Aggiungere e formattare caselle di testo
• Creare, inserire e modificare disegni e oggetti grafici
• Visualizzare e gestire le diapositive della presentazione
• Eseguire la presentazione
• Stampare le diapositive
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Applicare formati avanzati al testo
• Strutturare coerentemente un testo
• Inserire e formattare tabelle
• Aggiungere grafici per la rappresentazione dei dati
• Incorporare dati da altre applicazioni
• Lavorare con sfondi,immagini e colori
• Aggiungere effetti multimediali alla presentazione
• Personalizzare le presentazioni di Impress
Durata:
1 giorno
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
• Introduzione a OpenOffice Impress
• Aprire una presentazione esistente ed eseguirla
Contenuti
• Valorizzare l’aspetto del testo con i formati avanzati
• Creare e modificare una presentazione dalla vista struttura
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creare una nuova presentazione da modello
Creare una presentazione vuota
Salvare una presentazione
Scegliere un layout coerente
Inserire nuove diapositive
Eliminare una diapositiva
Aggiungere testo strutturato
Modificare lo sfondo della presentazione
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con il testo
Aggiungere caselle di testo
Lavorare con gli oggetti di testo
Modificare il formato del testo
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione della grafica
Disegnare e modificare linee e frecce
Disegnare semplici oggetti grafici
Incorporare testo agli oggetti grafici
Inserire immagini
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modificare gli oggetti grafici
Applicare il colore agli oggetti grafici
Spostare copiare ed eliminare gli oggetti
Modificare le dimensioni e le posizioni
Raggruppare e separare oggetti
Modificare l’ordine degli oggetti
•
•
•
•
Visualizzare e gestire le diapositive
Visualizzare la presentazione in anteprima
Aggiungere transizioni ed animazioni
Gestione degli intervalli
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con le tabelle
Aggiungere diapositive con layout tabella
Creare una tabella
Modificare il formato della tabella
Personalizzare la tabella nella diapositiva
•
•
•
•
Collegare grafici da file esterni
Scegliere il layout con i grafici
Ottimizzare l’oggetto grafico nella diapositiva
Modificare le opzioni e le caratteristiche degli oggetti grafici
• Lavorare con gli effetti multimediali
• Inserire transizioni e animazioni
• Lavorare con la presentazione cronometrata
•
•
•
•
Personalizzare le presentazioni di Impress
Usare la funzione imposta presentazione
Personalizzare la presentazione su schermo
Gestire le opzioni di Impress
• Stampare le diapositive
• Stampa della visualizzazione selezionata
AREA ICT - OpenSource
AREA ICT - OpenSource
247
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
246
OpenOffice Writer - base
OpenOffice Writer - intermedio
249
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Audience:
Utenti con scarsa conoscenza dell’applicazione che desiderano progredire e rendersi
autonomi
Audience:
Utenti mediamente esperti che desiderano approfondire la conoscenza di OpenOffice
Writer
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di base del sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Familiarità con OpenOffice Writer
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Creare e gestire i documenti
• Gestire il testo e verificarne la correttezza ortografica e linguistica
• Gestire il formato del testo
• Gestire il formato del paragrafo
• Gestire il formato della pagina
• Lavorare con l’anteprima di stampa
• Stampare il documento
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Lavorare con i formati di pagina avanzati
• Lavorare con le sezioni inserire simboli e caratteri speciali
• Creare e modificare tabelle
• Lavorare e gestire gli stili
• Creare modelli di documento
• Impostare la stampa unione
Durata:
1 giorno
Durata:
1 giorno
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione a OpenOffice Writer
Aprire un documento esistente
Creazione di un nuovo documento
Digitare, cancellare e sostituire il testo
Salvare il documento
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Selezione del testo
Copiare e spostare il testo
Correzione ortografica e grammaticale
Le correzioni automatiche
• Formattazione del testo
• Formattazione del paragrafo
• Inserire collegamenti ipertestuali
•
•
•
•
•
Formattazione della pagina
Intestazione piè di pagina
Lavorare con le visualizzazioni
Visualizzare l’anteprima di stampa
Stampare il documento
AREA ICT - OpenSource
Formati avanzati di pagina
Formattare le pagine con le colonne
Interruzioni di pagina, di riga e di colonna
Note a piè di pagina e note di chiusura
• Lavorare con le sezioni
• Formattare le sezioni
• Inserimento di tabelle
• Strutturazione dei dati
• Formattazione delle tabelle
•
•
•
•
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
248
Creazione di uno stile
Stili di testo e stili di paragrafo
Creazione di un modello
Applicazione di un modello
• Impostare la stampa unione
• Creazione di un database e unione dei dati
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OpenOffice Writer e Draw - avanzato
Pentaho - Introduzione
Versione:
a scelta dell’utente
Versione:
Audience:
Utenti esperti che desiderano acquisire conoscenze avanzate di OpenOffice Writer
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Conoscenza di OpenOffice Writer
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, l’utente sarà in grado di:
• Applicare formati avanzati al testo
• Salvare il formato in uno stile
• Applicare e modificare stili
• Lavorare con le proprietà del file
• Gestire documenti lunghi
• Inserire moduli e campi nei documenti
• Inserire immagini e oggetti esterni
• Condividere i documenti di OpenOffice Writer con altre applicazioni
• Modificare le opzioni del programma
Obiettivi
formativi:
Il corso avrà l’obiettivo di offrire una panoramica sul sistema gestionale Pentaho
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
Introduzione
• Componenti principali del sistema
• Cos’è una solution in Pentaho
• Introduzione alla GUI utente Pentaho User Console
• Introduzione alla GUI di amministrazione: Pentaho Administration Console
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
• Formattazione avanzata del testo
• Controllo del flusso del testo
• Applicare bordi e sfondi
• Creare, modificare e applicare gli stili di testo
• Le proprietà del file
• Inserire nuove informazioni relativamente al file
•
•
•
•
•
Lavorare con i documenti lunghi
Utilizzo del navigatore
Segnalibri e riferimenti incrociati
Creazione di un indice del documento
Inserire moduli per la compilazione di un documento
• Inserire campi
• Inserire immagini e altri oggetti grafici
• Utilizzo integrato di OpenOffice Draw per la creazione e modifica di documenti di
taglio editoriale
• Confrontare due documenti
• Revisionare un documento
• Utilizzo integrato di OpenOffice Writer con OpenOffice Impress e OpenOffice Calc
ETL
• Fasi principali di un processo ETL
• Esempio di un processo ETL di acquisizione dati
• Esempio di un processo ETL di distribuzione di contenuti a una serie di utenti
OLAP
• Concetti di base dell’analisi multidimensionale
• Cubi, dimensioni e misure
• L’utilizzo dei cubi OLAP nell’uso quotidiano per migliorare l’analisi dei dati
Reporting Tools
• Il Report Designer
• Struttura ed elementi del report
• Uso di formule e funzioni
• Uso di variabili e parametri
• SubReports
• Inserimento di Charts
• Pubblicazione e distribuzione dei reports
Metadati
• Cos’è un Metadata Layer, caratteristiche e vantaggi
• Reporting Self-Service
Cruscotti
• Esempio di un cruscotto interattivo con Pentaho CE: potenzialità
• Le opzioni di OpenOffice Writer
AREA ICT - OpenSource
251
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
250
Pentaho CE - Creare cruscotti ad effetto
Versione:
Versione:
Audience:
Audience:
253
Prerequisiti:
Il workshop ha come prerequisito una buona conoscenza di base di Pentaho, dei
concetti
relativi all’OLAP ed al linguaggio MDX e del linguaggio SQL E’ inoltre suggerita una
conoscenza anche di
base dei concetti dello sviluppo WEB (HTML, javascript, CSS) e della libreria JQuery
Prerequisiti:
Il workshop ha come prerequisito una buona conoscenza di base di Pentaho, dei
concetti
relativi all’OLAP ed al linguaggio MDX e del linguaggio SQL E’ inoltre suggerita una
conoscenza anche di
base dei concetti dello sviluppo WEB (HTML, javascript, CSS) e della libreria JQuery
Obiettivi
formativi:
La realizzazione di un piccolo prototipo è l’oggetto sul quale verteranno gli esercizi del
workshop con l’obiettivo di lasciare qualcosa in azienda che possa essere liberamente
utilizzato e dimostrato Per questo motivo chiediamo al cliente di identificare un caso di
semplice portata da affrontare durante il workshop Il cliente è tenuto a comunicarci in
anticipo lo scope di questo prototipo in maniera tale da giudicare se ne sia fattibile la
realizzazione nell’arco delle 2 giornate a disposizione
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
2 giorni
Contenuti
Cos’è una dashboard
• Concetti di base
• Caratteristiche di una buona dashboard
Dopo anni di predominio dei principali vendor commerciali oggi è possibile costruire una
soluzione completa di Business Intelligence affidandosi completamente a componenti
Open Source Il mercato dell’Open Source oggi propone tutti gli strumenti necessari per
permetterne fare questo passo in totale sicurezza
Diversi sono gli attori sul mercato ma l’obiettivo di questo workshop è analizzare
le componenti di Pentaho CE la più diffusa distribuzione Open Source di Business
Intelligence
La tecnologia messa a disposizione da questa distribuzione permette di coprire
diversi ambiti di business e ci dà la possibilità di costruire soluzioni che spaziano
dall’analisi delle vendite e della marginalità sui clienti all’analisi ed al reporting in
area amministrazione finanza e controllo, all’implementazione cruscotti per l’analisi
dei principali indicatori di performance (KPI) e all’analisi della Supply Chain e delle
segnalazioni operative
Il workshop fornisce ai partecipanti le competenze di base necessarie ad affrontare
l’implementazione di una soluzione utilizzando la suite Pentaho CE
Durata:
6 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Architettura del server ed installazione del pacchetto
Architettura del sistema di BI: componenti principali
Installazione del server
Principali task di configurazione
Cos’è una solution in Pentaho
Introduzione alla GUI utente Pentaho User Console
Introduzione alla GUI di amministrazione: Pentaho Administration Console
•
•
•
•
•
•
Concetti fondamentali di disegno di un DW
Principali componenti architetturali in un DW
Introduzione ai principi di design fondamentali
Fatti, dimensioni e misure
Gestire il cambiamento delle dimensioni nel tempo: Slow Changing Dimensions
La dimensione tempo
Introduzione ai principi di base della programmazione sul WEB
• HTML
• Javascript
• CSS
Introduzione a JQuery
• Concetti di base
CDF – Community Dashboard Framework
• Introduzione
• Widgets per la creazione di grafici
• Raccogliere gli input utente
• Interagire con la piattaforma
• Mappe
• Lifecycle dei componenti
CCC – Community Charts Components
CDA – Community Data Framework
• Il perché di un data access framework
• Connessioni e Data Access
• Parametri
• Manipolare il dataset con CDA
• Alimentare un widget CDF con CDA
CDE – Community Dashboard Editor
• Introduzione
• Layout e Datasources
• Posizioniamo i componenti sul cruscotto
AREA ICT - OpenSource
AREA ICT - OpenSource
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
252
Pentaho CE - Implementare un
datawarehouse
255
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ETL
ETL, ELT, EII: significato e differenze
Le sfide della data integration
Aspetti principali di un processo ETL: Data Acquisition, Data Quality
Introduzione di tool opensources per la Data Quality
Kettle: architettura e componenti principali
Installazione e configurazione
ll repository: creazione e gestione
Esecuzione dalla GUI: lancio e monitoring
Jobs e Trasformazioni: analisi dei principali steps tramite esempi pratici
Esecuzione da riga di comando: kitchen e pan
Esecuzione remota: Carte
Scheduling di Jobs e Trasformazioni
Metodi e modelli per l’implementazione di un ambiente di test e produzione
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OLAP
Concetti di base dell’analisi multidimensionale
Cubi, dimensioni e misure
Gerarchie, livelli e membri
Relazioni di parentela fra membri
Multidimensional Query Language (MDX)
Tipologie di server OLAP
Pentaho Analisys Service: architettura
Creare uno schema Mondrian con lo Schema Workbench
Gestione di grosse moli di dati mediante l’uso di pre-aggregati
Pubblicazione del cubo
JPivot e la visualizzazione del cubo: concetti fondamentali per l’uso quotidiano
•
•
•
•
•
Metadati
Cos’è un Metadata Layer, caratteristiche e vantaggi
Meccanismi di astrazione offerti
Pentaho Metadata Editor
Creazione e gestione di un Metadata Layer
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reporting Tools
Il Report Designer
Struttura ed elementi del report
Definizione ed uso dei DataSets
Uso di variabili e parametri
Uso di formule e funzioni
SubReports
Inserimento di Charts nei reports
Pubblicazione e distribuzione dei reports
Reporting Self-Service: uso di WAQR
•
•
•
•
•
Creare le action sequences con Design Studio
Cos’è un’action sequence
Pentaho Design Studio
Principali componenti nel disegno di un’action sequence pentaho
Schedulare una action sequence
AREA ICT - OpenSource
•
•
•
•
•
Disegnare le Dashboards con Pentaho CE
CCC - Community Chart Components
CDA - Community Data Access
CDF - Community Dashboard Framework
CDE - Community Dashboard Editor
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
254
AREA ICT - OpenSource
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Il workshop ha come prerequisito una buona conoscenza del linguaggio SQL ed una
conoscenza di base di JAVA, Javascript ed XML Durante il workshop verranno distribuite
dispense e altro
materiale per favorire la migliore comprensione degli argomenti trattati
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
• Cos’è un processo ETL
Problematiche di un processo ETL
• Data Quality
• Data Profiling
• Data Validation
• Requisiti principali di una soluzione ETL
Pentaho la piattaforma open per la Business Intelligence
• Architettura del BI Server
• Moduli principali della suite
257
Controllo e pulizia dei dati
• Steps di Data cleansing
• Come usare tabelle di crossreference per conformare i dati
• Validazione dei dati
• Gestione degli errori durante il processo
• Data Quality con Data Cleaner: Cenni
• Uso di scripting all’interno del processo ETL
Gestione delle chiavi nelle tabelle
• La transcodifica delle chiavi di business
• Generazione di chiavi surrogate con lo step Add Sequence
Caricare le tabelle delle dimensioni
• Schemi Star vs Snowflake
• Denormalizzare i dati per migliorare le performance
• Gestione delle Slowly Changing Dimensions
• Caricamento della tabella dei fatti
Schedulare il processo ETL
• Uso di cron per la schedulazione di jobs e trasformazioni
• Uso dello schedulatore interno al BI Server
• Richiamare trasformazioni e job dal BI Server
Integrazione dati con Pentaho
• Pentaho Data Integration: Architettura
• Moduli principali
OPENSOURCE
OPENSOURCE
256
Pentaho Data Integration - Implementare
soluzioni di integrazione dati
Installazione e configurazione del prodotto
• Configurazione dei datasource per la connessione alle sorgenti dati
• Configurazione di un repository di lavoro
Spoon: l’ambiente per la progettazione dei flussi
• Breve introduzione all’ambiente di lavoro
• Disegnamo il nostro primo processo con PDI
• Lancio di un processo in Spoon
• Analisi dei logs dell’esecuzione
• Attivare i processi da riga di comando: Kitchen e Pan
• Job Server: Carte
Disegno di una soluzione ETL con PDI: concetti fondamentali
• Jobs e Trasformazioni
• Parametri e variabili
Steps di input
• Acquisire dati da database
• Acquisire dati da files di testo, xml od excel
• Connettersi a sistemi esterni (ERP o CRM)
• Acquisire dati dal web: Http Clients e SOAP
AREA ICT - OpenSource
AREA ICT - OpenSource
258
Red Hat Enterprise Deployment and Systems
Management
Versione:
Red Hat Enterprise Directory Services and
Authentication
259
Versione:
Audience:
Experienced Linux system administrators responsible for the planning, deployment, and
management of multiple physical or virtualized server
Prerequisiti:
An RHCE certification or equivalent experience
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
4 days
Contenuti
• Efficient team-based management of large-scale systems--before, during, and after
deployment
• Installation and administration of Red Hat Network Satellite
• Building custom RPM packages
• Using Subversion to make changes to scripts
• RHN Satellite organizations, users, and roles
• Managing changes with revision control software
• Managing software with Red Hat Network, including software channels and errata
• Construction of custom RPM packages
• Reporting and automation with Red Hat Network programming API
• Deploying configuration files using Red Hat Network
• Bare-metal provisioning with PXE
Audience:
Experienced Linux system administrators responsible for the overall security of their
systems and networked services
Experienced Linux system administrators tasked with security on other operating
systems but who now want to perform those tasks on a Red Hat Linux system
Prerequisiti:
The essential elements of how to configure the services covered, as this course will be
focusing on more advanced topics
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
4 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Understanding basic LDAP concepts
Configuring and managing Red Hat Directory Server
Managing user authentication with PAM and glibc NSS
Using Kerberos and LDAP to centrally manage user authentication
Using LDAP referrals and replication for distributed, highly available directory server
performance
• Exploring options for integration with Microsoft Active Directory authentication
RED HAT
RED HAT
AREA ICT - Red Hat
AREA ICT - Red Hat
Red Hat Enterprise Security Network Services
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization
261
Versione:
Experienced Linux system administrators responsible for the overall security of their
systems and networked services
Experienced Linux system administrators tasked with security on other operating
systems but who now want to perform those tasks on a Red Hat Linux system
The essential elements of how to configure the services covered, as this course focuses
on more advanced topics
RHCE certification or equivalent experience
Obiettivi
formativi:
Audience:
Experienced Linux system administrators responsible for managing enterprise servers
who are interested in learning how to manage large numbers of servers or virtual
machines using Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization
Prerequisiti:
The professionals who have earned an Red Hat Certified System Administrator (RHCSA)
certification or maintain the equivalent experience with Linux
System administration experience on Microsoft Windows operating systems is beneficial
but not necessary for this course
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
4 days
Durata:
4 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contenuti
• Deploy Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization platform
• Configure Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization environment (datacenters, clusters, and
storage domains)
• Install, manage, and troubleshoot virtual machines (servers and desktops)
• Create virtual machine snapshots and explore high-availability options
• Use templates for rapid virtual machine deployment
• Secure Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization environment with multilevel administrative
roles
• Monitor and create custom reports
Mastering basic service security
Understanding cryptography
Securing BIND and DNS
Hardening remote procedure call (RPC) services
Using Kerberos for centrally managed user authentication
Improving Network File System (NFS) security with Kerberos and NFSv4
Advanced uses of Secure Shell
Building a secure email infrastructure
Securing FTP and Apache HTTPD services
Basics of intrusion detection and response
AREA ICT - Red Hat
RED HAT
RED HAT
260
AREA ICT - Red Hat
Red Hat Linux Troubleshooting
Versione:
Red Hat System Administration I
263
Versione:
Audience:
Linux system administrators who understand how to install and configure a Red Hat
Enterprise Linux system and who wish to deepen their understanding of troubleshooting
on Linux
Prerequisiti:
Have system administration knowledge under Red Hat Enterprise Linux, including:
• Installation
• Service management
• Basic system monitoring
• File system management
• Basic troubleshooting
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
4 days
Contenuti
• Introduction to troubleshooting techniques, including being prepared
• Troubleshooting hardware, including listing, testing, and analyzing devices
• Troubleshooting applications, including diagnosing performance problems and
investigating application and OS interactions
• Troubleshooting disks and file systems, including LVM, LUKS, ext3/4, and
unauthorized changes
• Troubleshooting the network, including configuring, testing, and diagnosing
problems with basic and advanced configurations
• Security, including working effectively with (and not against) security tools like
SELinux, authentication, and firewall
• Making the most of Red Hat support resources
AREA ICT - Red Hat
Audience:
A Microsoft Windows system administrator who needs to quickly learn core Red Hat
Enterprise Linux proficiencies
A system administrator, network administrator, or other IT professional who requires
proficiency performing core tasks in the Linux OS
A non-Linux IT professional on the path to becoming a full-time Linux system
administrator
Prerequisiti:
Previous operating system administration experience is helpful but not required for this
course
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Graphical installation of Linux
Managing physical storage
Introduction to the command line
Learning how to install and configure local components and services
Establishing network and securing network services
Managing and securing files
Administrating users and groups
Deploying file-sharing services
GUI-based tools and key command-line concepts
Basic security skills
AREA ICT - Red Hat
RED HAT
RED HAT
262
264
Red Hat System Administration II
Versione:
Red Hat System Administration III
265
Versione:
Audience:
IT professionals who have attended Red Hat System Administration I and want the skills
to be full-time enterprise Linux administrators or earn RHCSA certification
Audience:
Senior Linux system administrators who require networking and security administration
skills
Prerequisiti:
Red Hat System Administration I
Prerequisiti:
Red Hat System Administration I and Red Hat System Administration II with exam
courses
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Network configuration and troubleshooting
Managing file systems and logical volumes
Controlling user and file access
Installing and managing services and processes
Essential command-line operations
Troubleshooting file systems and partitioning
LVM, access control, and package management
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enhancing user security
Disk management with Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI)
System and network activity monitoring
Network management and packet filtering
Software management
Web-service management
File sharing across platforms
Basic SMTP management
RED HAT
RED HAT
AREA ICT - Red Hat
AREA ICT - Red Hat
Certified Ethical Hacker (CEH)
Versione:
Audience:
267
Versione:
This course will significantly benefit security officers, auditors, security professionals,
site administrators, and anyone
who is concerned about the integrity of the network infrastructure
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Audience:
The CHFI program is designed for all IT professionals involved with information system
security, computer forensics, and incident response
Prerequisiti:
It is strongly recommended that you attend the Certified Ethical Hacker class before
enrolling into CHFI program
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
Introduction to Ethical Hacking
Footprinting and Reconnaissance
Scanning Networks
Enumeration
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Hacking
Trojans and Backdoors
Viruses and Worms
Sniffers
Social Engineering
Denial of Service
Session Hijacking
Hacking Webservers
Hacking Web Applications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Computer Forensics in Today’s World
Computer Forensics Investigation Process
Searching and Seizing Computers
Digital Evidence
First Responder Procedures
Computer Forensics Lab
Understanding Hard Disks and File Systems
Windows Forensics
•
•
•
•
•
•
SQL Injection
Hacking Wireless Networks
Evading IDS, Firewalls and Honeypots
Buffer Overflows
Cryptography
Penetration Testing
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data Acquisition and Duplication
Recovering Deleted Files and Deleted Partitions
Forensics Investigation Using AccessData FTK
Forensics Investigation Using EnCase
Steganography and Image File Forensics
Application Password Crackers
Log Capturing and Event Correlation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Network Forensics, Investigating Logs and Investigating Network Traffic
Investigating Wireless Attacks
Investigating Web Attacks
Tracking Emails and Investigating Email Crimes
Mobile Forensics
Investigative Reports
Becoming an Expert Witness
AREA ICT - Sicurezza informatica
AREA ICT - Sicurezza informatica
SICUREZZA INFORMATICA
SICUREZZA INFORMATICA
266
Computer Hacking Forensic Investigator
(CHFI)
Versione:
Audience:
Prerequisiti:
269
• Module XXVII: Creating Fault Tolerance
This course will significantly benefit System Administrators, System Engineers, Firewall
Administra¬tors, Network Managers, IT Managers, IT Professionals and anyone who is
interested in network security technologies
This course is a prerequisite for the CEH program
• Module XXVIII: Incident Response
• Module XXIX: Disaster Recovery and Planning
• Module XXX: Network Vulnerability Assessment
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• Module I: Fundamentals of Computer Network
• Module II: Network Protocols
• Module III: Protocol Analysis
• Module IV: Hardening Physical Security
• Module V: Network Security
• Module VI: Security Standards Organizations
• Module VII: Security Standards
• Module VIII: Security Policy
• Module IX: IEEE Standards
SICUREZZA INFORMATICA
SICUREZZA INFORMATICA
268
EC-Council Network Security Administrator
(ENSA)
• Module X: Network Security Threats
• Module XI: Intrusion Detection System (IDS) and Intrusion Prevention Systems (IPS)
• Module XII: Firewalls
• Module XIII: Packet Filtering and Proxy Servers
• Module XIV: Bastion Host and Honeypots
• Module XV: Securing Modems
• Module XVI: Troubleshooting Network
• Module XVII: Hardening Routers
• Module XVIII: Hardening Operating Systems
• Module XIX: Patch Management
• Module XX: Log Analysis
• Module XXI: Application Security
• Module XXII: Web Security
• Module XXIII: E-mail Security
• Module XXIV: Authentication: Encryption, Cryptography and Digital Signatures
• Module XXV: Virtual Private Networks and Remote Networking
• Module XXVI: Wireless Network Security
AREA ICT - Sicurezza informatica
AREA ICT - Sicurezza informatica
SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 Administration 3103
Versione:
SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 Administration
271
Versione:
Audience:
The course is designed for those who already have experience with Linux, including
general system configuration and command line work
Audience:
This course is designed for system administrators who need to become familiar with the
Linux operating system
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course, it is highly recommended that you have a good working
knowledge of Linux and should be able to:
• Install SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11
• Perform partitioning and file system setup and maintenance
• Perform system configuration including network setup and user management
• Manage software packages
• Work on the command line including file management and text editing
Prerequisiti:
Before taking this course, you should have fundamental knowledge of the Linux
Operating System either through attendance of Course 3101 - SUSE Linux Enterprise 11
Fundamentals or another equivalent course
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - SUSE
Configure Fundamental Networking Services
Manage Printing
Configure and Use Open LDAP
Configure and Use Samba
Configure a Web Server
Configure and Use IPv6
Perform a Health Check and Performance Tuning
Create Shell Scripts
Deploy SUSE Linux Enterprise
Xen
LiveFire Exercise
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Install SLE
Manage System Initialization
Administer Linux Processes and Services
Administer Storage
Configure the Network
Manage Hardware
Configure Remote Access
Monitor SLE 11
Automate Tasks
Manage Backup and Recovery
Administer User Access and Security
SUSE
SUSE
270
AREA ICT - SUSE
SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 Fundamentals
Versione:
273
Versione:
Audience:
This course is designed for those who have little or no experience with Linux and who
are seeking a fundamental understanding of the SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 operating
system
Audience:
This course is addressed to those familiar with Windows Desktop (eg Windows XP) as
user or administrator and who now want to gain in-depth knowledge on tasks a Linux
system administrator has to perform routinely on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Prerequisiti:
Before taking this course, you are required to have only basic computer skills on any
operating system This course is designed for people who are beginners with the Linux
operating system Knowledge of any desktop operating system is sufficient
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course you should be familiar with a Windows desktop Linux
knowledge would be a plus, but is not a prerequisite, as the course covers basic Linux
knowledge, like files and file system layout, user management, how to use the shell and
basic functionalities of YaST
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
• SECTION 1: First Steps with Linux
• SECTION 2: Locate and Use Help Resources
• SECTION 3: Manage Linux File System
• SECTION 4: Work with the Linux Shell and CLI
• SECTION 5: Administer Linux with YaST
• SECTION 6: Manage Users, Groups, and Permissions
• SECTION 7: Use Linux Text Editors
• SECTION 8: Manage Software with RPM
AREA ICT - SUSE
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Install SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Use the Linux Desktop
Locate and use Help Resources
Administer Linux with YaST
Manage the Network Configuration
Manage Software
Manage Directories and Files
•
•
•
•
Work with the Linux Shell and Command line
Manage Users, Groups and Permissions
Monitor the Linux Systems and Control Processes and Services
Manage System Initialization
•
•
•
•
Administer Printing
Integrate SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 into existing environments
Customize the Graphical Interface on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Deploy SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
AREA ICT - SUSE
SUSE
SUSE
272
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Administration
Versione:
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10: Networking
Services
275
Versione:
Audience:
This course is for people with basic Linux administration knowledge and now want to
gain in-depth knowledge on administrative tasks routinely performed on SUSE Linux
Enterprise Desktop 11
Prerequisiti:
Before attending this course you should be familiar with the Linux administration You
should also be familiar with a Windows desktop
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Customizing the graphical interface of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop
Locking down the SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop
Using the NetWorkManager to configure the network
Activating and using IPv6
Integrating SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop into an Active Directory environment
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Integrating SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop into an eDirectory environment
Integrating SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop into a UNIX environment
Accessing remote desktops
Using multimedia on a SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop
Configuring email
Creating shell scripts
Deploying SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop
AREA ICT - SUSE
Audience:
The course is designed for those who already have experience with Linux, including
general system configuration and command line work
Prerequisiti:
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Fundamentals and SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
Administration
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manage Virtualization with Xen Configure a Web Application Server
Configure and Use Samba
Enable Fundamental Network Services
Create Shell Scripts
Compile Software from Source
Perform a Health Check and Performance Tuning
Manage Hardware Components
SUSE
SUSE
274
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Administration
AREA ICT - SUSE
276
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
Administration
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10: Security
Versione:
Audience:
277
Versione:
This course is designed for experienced Linux system administrators who are familiar
with networking services running on Linux, and who want to improve their skills
in planning, designing and managing a secure SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
environment
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Understanding General Considerations and Definition of Terms
Applying Host Security
Using Novell AppArmor
Understanding and Using Cryptography: Basics and Practical Application
Applying Network Security
•
•
•
•
•
Implementing General Firewall Design
Understanding and Using Packet Filters
Configuring Application-Level Gateways
Setting up secure Virtual Private Networks
Utilizing Intrusion Detection and Incident Response
AREA ICT - SUSE
This course is ideal for those who have gained basic skills with Linux as taught in SUSE
Linux Enterprise Server 10 Fundamentals and now want to gain in depth knowledge on
tasks a Linux system administrator has to perform routinely on SUSE Linux Enterprise
Server 10
Prerequisiti:
Attendees need to be familiar with files and file system layout, user management, how
to use a shell and basic functionalities of YaST
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Performing and Troubleshooting SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Installation
Administering the Linux File System
Administering User Access and Security
Configuring the Network Manually
Administering Linux Processes and Services
Monitoring SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
Configuring System Initialization
Managing Software for SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
Managing Backup and Recovery
Managing Printing on Linux
Configuring Remote Access
AREA ICT - SUSE
SUSE
SUSE
Durata:
Audience:
Versione:
279
Versione:
Audience:
The course is designed for those who already have experience with Linux, including
general system configuration and command line work
Prerequisiti:
This course is designed for students who have intermediate level knowledge of Linux
They should be able to:
• Understand what Linux is and know about the OpenSource concept
• Perform a basic installation of SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
• Perform a basic system configuration including network setup
• Manage software packages
• Work on the command line including file management and text editing
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
5 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AREA ICT - SUSE
Managing Virtualization with Xen
Configuring a Web Application Server
Configuring and Using Samba
Enabling Fundamental Network Services
Creating Shell Scripts
Compiling Software from Source
Performing a Health Check and Performance Tuning
Managing Hardware Component
Audience:
This course is ideal for those who have little or no experience with Linux and who are
seeking a fundamental understanding of the SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 operating
system
Prerequisiti:
This course is designed for beginners with the Linux operating system Attendees are
required to have only basic computer skills on any operating system Knowledge of a
desktop operating system is sufficient
Obiettivi
formativi:
Durata:
3 days
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Understanding the Linux Story
The History of Linux
Installing SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
Using the Linux Desktop
Administering Linux with YaST
Locating and Using Help Resources
Managing Directories and Files
Working With the Linux Shell and Command Line
Using Linux Text Editors
Managing User, Groups, and Permissions
SUSE
SUSE
278
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10
Fundamentals
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 Advanced
Administration
AREA ICT - SUSE
Introduzione a UNIX
Versione:
Audience:
281
Versione:
Il corso è indirizzato a chiunque voglia imparare ad utilizzare UNIX ed ha una buona
conoscenza dei sistemi operativi Windows più recenti
Prerequisiti:
Obiettivi
formativi:
Programmazione in UNIX Shell
Audience:
Utenti e programmatori di applicazioni UNIX, amministratori di sistema e in generale
tutti coloro che devono operare con questo sistema operativo
Prerequisiti:
Al termine del corso, i partecipanti saranno in grado di:
• Comprendere il sistema generale UNIX/LINUX
• Lavorare con i principali comandi del Sistema Operativo Unix
• Creare file di testo usando lo screen editor
• Usare le principali funzionalità della Shell
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
Un po’ di storia: le origini di UNIX
La linea dei comandi e i comandi più comuni
La struttura del File System
Directory di sistema e dell’utente
Operatività con le directory
•
•
•
•
•
Modalità di navigazione del File System
Tipi di file e proprietà
Nomi dei file
Gestione dei file
Spostare, copiare, cancellare
•
•
•
•
•
Le variabili di shell
Esportazione di variabili e processi
Sicurezza dei file
Input/Output
Operatvità con l’editor vi
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Personalizzazione della configurazione di sistema
Ricerca dei file
Archiviazione e compressione dei file
I sottosistemi applicativi in UNIX
Architettura LAMP
Sistemi di stampa
DBServer
Mail Server
AREA ICT - Unix
Obiettivi
formativi:
Al termine del corso, i partecipanti saranno in grado di:
• Gestire in piena autonomia tutti gli aspetti operativi legati alla programmazione in
ambiente UNIX
Durata:
3 giorni
Contenuti
•
•
•
•
•
•
Introduzione ai comandi principali
Comandi per la gestione delle directory
Comandi per la visualizzazione e la gestione dei file
Comandi per il controllo degli accessi ai file
Comandi di modifica dei file
Comandi di archiviazione e compressione
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gestione avanzata di file
Il controllo dei processi
Informazioni sui processi
Creazione ed esecuzione di un processo
Foreground e background
Processi in background
Sospensione di un processo e foreground
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Utilizzare le Regular Expressions
Ricerca avanzata di testi
Creare le procedure Shell
Esecuzione delle procedure Shell
Modalità di esecuzione di comandi shell
Le variabile della programmazione Shell
Programmazione Shell avanzata
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Debug
Operatività per l’utente esperto
Il comando wc
ordinare
Traduzione di set di caratteri
Visualizzazione di dump di file
Ricerca di stringhe di testo in file binari
Operatività per l’amministrazione
Il sistema X Windows
UNIX
UNIX
280
AREA ICT - Unix
Milano - Foggia - Roma
wwwknowkit